Cộng đồng chia sẻ tri thức Lib24.vn

Giáo án thí điểm tiếng anh lớp 6 trọn bộ 2016 - 2017

9bff7080506bc3a673744bace8f5941d
Gửi bởi: quynhnhu109 9 tháng 4 2017 lúc 16:59 | Được cập nhật: 20 tháng 2 lúc 11:53 Kiểu file: DOC | Lượt xem: 2800 | Lượt Download: 233 | File size: 0 Mb

Nội dung tài liệu

Tải xuống
Link tài liệu:
Tải xuống

Các tài liệu liên quan


Có thể bạn quan tâm


Thông tin tài liệu

Detected invalid UTF-8 for field path "$set.content": Date of planning:
Date of teaching:
Period 1
H??NG D?N S? D?NG SCH GIO KHOA, TI LI?U H?C T?P, PH??NG PHP H?C T?P B? MN
I. Objectives
- By the end of this lesson , Ss can know something about England.
- Helps sts understand sth about English and have the effective ways to learn it.
II. Teaching aids.
- Book, planning, picture
III. Procedure
A. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance: 6A1,6A4???????..
B. New lesson.
Sts' and T's activities
Contents
1. Warm up.
- Chatting: What aspects of learning English do you find the most difficult?
2. Activities
A- T. asks sts some questions about England.
- What do you know about England?
T. gives sts something about England and English.







* English is an international language.
Sts work in groups to talk about England in Vietnamese.


B- Introduce the English book. Student book and Workbook













- How can you learn English well.






5.Home work:

- Listening?


- It located in North-west coast of Europe with very mild weather not too hot but not too cold.
- It consists of four parts: England, Wales, Scotland and Ireland.
- It's official name is the UK
- Each part has its own flag of UK.
-There are many interesting things of England and you'll gradually know about them in the progress of learning English.
English is used all over the world in every aspect of life.
It's the international language of every fields: communication,trade,economic, cooperation......

It consists of 6 units
- Unit 1: My new school - 7 lessons
- Unit 2: My home
- Unit 3: My friends
- Review 1
- Unit 4:My Neighbourhood
- Unit 5: Natural Wonders of the world
- Unit 6 : Our Tet Holiday
- Review 2






- English is not too difficult but it requires your working hard.
- Focusing on vocabulary you come across. Write sentence with the new words to understand more

- Review the lesson everyday.
- Practise English everyday
Prepare for unit 1: My new school.






















Ngy so?n : 12/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 19/ 8/ 2016
Period 1: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand " A special day", review vocabs about school things.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students
Board & contents
Warm up
(Network)
-Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get Ss to write down vocabs about school things.
-Give feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.
-Provide some more vocabs about school things.
A. WARM UP. (Network)
ruler


-Present new words.

- Check: Rub out and Remember.
B. NEW LESSON
* Vocabulary
- excited (adj): ho h?ng
- calculator (n): my tnh
- uniform (n): ??ng ph?c
- smart (adj): thng minh
- put on = wear: mang, m?c, ??i.
1. Listen and Read
? Look at the picture.
What is Phong doing?
Who are Vy and Duy?
Where are they going?
Why is it a special day?
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to do the true, false exercise.
-Get them to read aloud the answers.
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.
-Give feed back.
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to find the expression.
1.oh dear. 2. You'll see
3. come in 4. Sure

- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud.
- Correct some.


-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask qs to check Ss' understanding of the poem.
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct

- Ask Ss to match the words with the school things.
- Let ss listen and read.
- Explain some words if necessary.





1.Listen & Read




a. *Answers: 1T
2T
3F
4T
5F

b. *Answers:
1.oh dear: Express surprise (negative)
2. You'll see: " You'll find out"
3. come in: invite sb in
4. Sure: "yes"/ alright.
c. Example:
A: Oh dear. I forgot my calculator.
B: That's OK, you can borrow mine.
A: Thank you.
2. Poem.
Example.
Khanh is going back to school today
His friends??.



3. Matching.
Answer key:
1. b- pencil sharpener 6. i- pecil case
2. e- compass 7. f- notebook
3. j- school bag 8. a- bicycle
4. d- rubber 9. g- ruler
5. c- calculator 10.h- textbook




- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the things and say out the words, make up sentences with the words if there is time.
-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their vocabulary book.

C. CONSOLIDATION





Homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................




Ngy so?n : 13/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 20/ 8/ 2016
Period 2: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ou/ and /A/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.
Teacher & Students
Board & contents

Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get them to write the subjects they have learnt.
-Give feed back

A. WARM UP
Math



English



-Play the recording and let ss listen.
-Play again and pause for them to repeat each word.
-Ss repead- read
-Correct pronunciation.


-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 into groups.
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms.
-Check the answer. Explain to them which words go with each verb.




-Tell Ss to do the task individually.
-Then call some ss to write on the board.
-Correct their mistakes.








-Ask Ss to write sentences about themselves in their notebooks, using combination above.
- Ss write as many sentences as posible.
-Go around the class and correct some.
B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
Physic exercises
English vocabulary
History football
Home work lessons
Judo music
School lunch science
2. Put the words into groups.
play
do
have
study
Football
music
Homework
Judo
exercises
School lunch
lessons
Physics
English
History
Vocabs
science
3. Put one of these words in each blank.
lesson football
science judo
homework
1. I do??with my friend, Vy.
2. Duy plays?.for the school team.
3. All the?. new school are interesting.
4. they are healthy. They do?.every day.
5. I study maths, English and?..on Mondays.
Key. 1. homework 2. football
3. lessons 4. judo
5. science
4. Write sentences about yourself using the combination above.
Eg: I/ We have English lessons on Tuesday and Thursday.
?????????


-Let Ss practice the sounds /ou/ and /A/ together. Ask Ss to observe the T's lip positions for these two sounds.
-Ss look at the T's lip position and listen and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as posible.
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to work individually.
- Ss work in individual then check their answer in groups.
-Call some to write the answers on the board .
-Give feed back.
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat sentence by sentence. Help them to recognize the two sounds then underline them in the sentences.
II. PRONUNCIATION
5. Listen and repeat
1. /??/ :judo going homework open
2. /?/: brother Monday mother month





6. Listen to the words and put them into two groups.
Key.
/??/
/?/
Rode
Don't
Hope
Homework
post
Some
Monday
Month
Come
one
7. Listen and repeat. Underline the sounds /??/ and /?/ you hear.

Home work
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
C. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Practice the sounds /??/ and /?/.
-Do Ex?in Ex book.
* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................



Ngy so?n : 15/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 22/ 8/ 2016
Period 3: Unit 1 : My new school
Lesson 3: A closer look 2
I. Teaching points:
- Review Present simple and Present continuous tenses.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write sentences.
-correct, give marks.

A. OLD LESSON
Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
Eg: I play football for the school team.



-Introduce "Miss Nguyet is interviewing Duy for the school newsletter. Write the correct form of the verbs."
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 minutes.
- Correct their answer. Or give explaination if necessary.

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the interview.
-Observe and help ss when and where necessary.
-Correct Ss'pronunciation & verb form.


-Let Ss read the example to understand the task.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their notebooks, refering to the interview.
-Go around to help.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board.
-Check their answer sentence by sentence.


- Then ask ss to give the rule and use of the present simple themselves.
- Give more examples.
1. I always walk to school.
2. He always walks to school.
3. We don't like playing football.
4. She doesn't like playing football.

- Ss work in pairs. Take turns to ask questions and give answers.
-Go round and correct mistakes or give help when necessary.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the present simple.
Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
* Key.
1. has 2. Do you have
3. love 4. Does Vy walk
5. ride 6. teaches
7. doesn't play 8. reads
9. go 10. do

Ex2.Role-play the interview.




Ex3. Correct sentences.
Eg:
Duy's new school has a small playground.
- Duy's new school has a large playground.
Key:
1. Duy lives near here.
2. Duy likes/ loves his new school.
3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
5. At break time, Phong reads in the library.
GRAMMAR:
The present simple.
Form: (+) S(I, You, We, They) + V
S(She, He, It) + Vs/es
(-) S + don't/ doesn't + V
(?) Do/ Does + S + V ?
Use: Something often happens or fixed.
Ex4: Make questions then interview.
1.You/ ride your bicycle / to school.
-Do you ride your bicycle to school?
2. You/ read/ in the library/ at break time.
3. You/ like your new school.
4. Your friends / go to school / with you.
5. You/ do your home work/ after school.


-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in getting started. And find out the verbs used in the present continuous tense.
-Write on the board.








-Ask Ss to study the example first then do the exercices.
- Correct.









-Ask them to say the differences between the two tenses.




-Ask Ss to do the task in pairs.
-Call some to give their answers.
- correct their mistakes and explain why?






-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

II. Review the present continuous.
Ex5. Underline the present continuous in Getting started.
Eg: is knocking?, is having?, are wearing?
GRAMMAR. The present continuous.
Form:
(+) S + am/is/are + V-ing.
(-) S + am/is/are not + V-ing
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + V-ing?
Use :Something is happening now.
Ex6: Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs.
Eg: -Yummy! I (have)........school lunch with my new friends.
-Yummy! I am having school lunch with my new friends.
1. I am not playing football now. I'm tired.
2. Shh! They are studying in the library.
3. Duy and Phong aren't doing their homework.
4. Now I am having an English lesson with Mr Lee.
5. Phong, Vy and Duy are riding their bicycles to school now.
Something often happens or fixed: The present simple
Something is happening now: the present continuous
Ex7: Choose the correct tense of the verbs.
1. My family have/ are having dinner now.
2. Mai wears/ is wearing her uniform on Mondays and Saturdays.
3. The school year in Vietnam starts/ is stating on Seps 5th
4. Now Duong watches/ is watching Ice Age on Video.
5. Look! The girls kip/ are skipping in the school yard.
Ex8. Read Vy's e-mail to her friend.


-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Guide Ss to do home work.
C. HOME WORK
1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two tenses.
2. Do Ex8 at home:
-Underline things that often happen or are fixed.
-then underline things that are happening.
-Compare Vy's first week with yours.
Eg: + Both Vy and I are having an interesting first week.
+ I wear uniform every day but Vy wears uniform only on Mondays and Saterdays.
+ ?.
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................










Ngy so?n : 19/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 26/ 8/ 2016
Period 4: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
I.Teaching points:
-To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about making friends and how a good friend is.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.
III. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
Warm up
Hang man
Have Ss play the game
-Get them to listen to the eliciting and guess the word
-Ss try to find out the letter building the word.
-T gives feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.
? excited
A. WARM- UP
Hangman
_ _ _ _ _ _ _
(1)
(2) ? (3)
(4) (5)


(6) (7)
Pre-
-Present new words. Tell Ss that these vocabs will appear in the task that follow.
-Ss listen and answer to find out the meaning of the words.
-note down.
Have Ss play game: ROR

B. NEW LESSON
1. Vocabulary
-pocket money: ti?n tiu v??t
-share (v): chia se?
-help (v): giu?p ???
-remember (v): nh??
-classmate: ba?n cu?ng l??p



While -
- Ask some Ss how they often make friends, what they often say when they first meet a new friend. What question they often ask?.
- Ss listen and answer.
- Let Ss read and tick the questions individually.
-Then ask them to discuss in group.
-Go round and ask why or why not they ticked this or that question.
-Allow Ss some time to write questions on a piece of paper, share them with the class or group.

- Ask Ss to give qualities of a good friend in class (adjective).
- Ss give as many words as possible.
-Divide the class into groups of 4or 5 .
- Ss take turns to interview the other members, using the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give nice sentences about friendship.
2.Game :
Ask your new friends.
- Are you from around here?
- Do you like pop music?
- How much pocket money do you get?
- What is your favorite subject at school?
- Are you hungry?
- Do you play football?
- How do you gat to school every day?
- Where do you go shopping?




3. Friendship quiz
Eg:
- friendly, generous, helpful, cheerfful, reserved, humorous, socable, nice, polite?



Eg: "Friend are forever"
????????..
Post-
-Choose some Ss to present to the class about their good friends and why they are good friends.


Eg:
"This is Nam, he is my classmate. He is very helpful, he often helps me in doing home work?.."
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
4. Home work
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................















Ngy so?n : 20/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 27/ 8/ 2016
Period 5: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 5: Skill 1 - Reading
I. Teaching points:
- To develop reading comprehension skill and to know some more new words in context: boarding school, international school, creative students?
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

-Call 2 Ss to tell about their good friends.
-Correct some and give mark.

A. OLD LESSON.
S1: He is Nam. He is sociable and?
Pre-
-Ask Ss to look at the three pictures then give their ideas about the schools in the pictures.
-Encourage Ss to give as many ideas as possible.


B. NEW LESSON
I. Introduction.
Eg:-In PLC Sydney school, I can see some girls are practicing doing something. So I think it is a comfortable school. It is a very good school.
-???.

While
-Let Ss read the three passages to check their ideas.
-Ss do the task indidually in 5 minutes
-Note some information.

-Ask Ss to read the passages again, then find the words in the passages. Help Ss to understand the meaning of the words: explaining or examples or the Vietnamese equivalent.
-Ss should pay attention to the context of the words.



-Ask Ss to read the text again to find words to finish the sentences.
-Let Ss note where they found the information that helped them complete sentences.
-Ss can discuss and compare with their friends.
-Correct the answer then let Ss read aloud the sentences in chorus then in individual.
-Check pronunciation and intonation.
II. Reading
1. Ex1.



2. Ex2. What do the words mean.
boarding surrounded
international creative
-It is a boarding school: many students study and live there.
-The school is surrounded by mountains and fields.
-?international school?for Ss from year 1 to year 12, Ss learn English with foreign teachers.
-some creative students do drawings and paitings in the art club.
3. Ex3. Complete sentences.
1. Students study and live in a?..school. They only go home at weekend.
2. ??has an art club.
3. There are girls' school in?..
4. Around An Lac school, there are fields and...
5. At Vinabrita School, Ss learn E with?
Key:
1. boarding 2. Vinabrita 3. Australia
4. mountains 5. E speaking teachers.
Post-

-Allow Ss to complete the table.
-Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss then complete the table. (Ss can use the background of the school).
-Ask some to talk to the class.





-Discuss any common errors and provide further practice.

III. Speaking.
Ex4:Which school would you like to go.
Name of school
Reasons you like it
Reasons you don't like it




Background of the schools.
-PLC Sydney: an international school for girls from kindergatern to year 12 in Sydney, Australia.
-An Lac Lower Secondery School: a small school in a mountainous region in Son Dong Dist, Bac Giang Province.
-Vinabrita School: an international school for Ss from year 1 to year 12 in Ha Noi.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.

Home work
- Learn by heart new vocab
-Do exercises in work book


* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

=============================================




Ngy so?n : 29/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 06/ 9/ 2016
Period 7: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK
I. Teaching points:
- Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points:
The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

-Have Ss work in 2 teams.
-Ss write as many words as possible.
A. WARM-UP. Brainstorming.
+ calculator
School things. + compass
+ ?


-Ss write the words.
- Correct mistakes.
-Repeat the words.



Ss write the answer.
-Correct



-Pay the recording twice.
-Ss listen then write words in the correct places.
-Give correction.
B. NEW LESSON.
I. Vocabs.
1. Match the pictures.
1. dictionary 4. notebook
2. uniform 5. compass
3. pencil sharpener 6. calculator
2. Match A with B.
1. b
2. c
3. a
4. d
3. Listen and write down the words you hear.
Play: sports, badminton, music.
Do: morning exercise, homework
Study: new words, geography.
Have: English lesson, a new book.




-Call on Ss to give the answers.

-Give feed back and the correct answers.





-Ss do Ex individually.
- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.





-Ss do Ex individually.
- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.






-Ss do Ex individually.
- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.
II. Grammar.
4. Complete the sentences using present simple.
1. He comes from Da Nang.
2. Do you study English? No, I don't.
3. She walks to school with her friends.
4. I do my homework after school.
5. Mr Vo teaches physics at my school.
6. The team play football on saterday.
5. Complete the sentences using present continuous.
1. are doing
2. are riding
3. is?studying
4. is having
5. am walking
6. is teaching
6. Complete sentences with the correct form of the verbs.
1. lives
2. is
3. has
4. is walking
5. go
6. study
7. are working
8. loves
III. Communication
7. Match the questions with the answers.
b- g d- f e- a h- g
8. Role-play.


-Ask Ss to write their dream school at home
-Divide the class into 3 groups.
-Ask Ss to use the pictures and their imagination.
C. PROJECT
Your dream school


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
D. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 2 - Getting Started.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................




Ngy so?n : 28/ 8/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 07/ 9/ 2016

Period 8: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 1: Getting started
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My house".
II. Content:
- Vocab: house lexical items.
- Grammar: +Prepositions of place and: "there is/ there isn't/ there are/ there aren't ."
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
IV. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. Warm up
- Teacher writes on the board: " My home " and ask what "home" means to them.
- T. writes their answer on the board.
- T. explains it can be the house or apartment where you live or can refer to a family living together.

- Listen and answer individually.

I. Presentation
1. New words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)
- T. reads the new words and ss. repeat .
- Checking vocab: Slap the board
* Set the scene:
- Ask ss to look at the picture on page 30.
? What are Mi and Nick doing?
? Where are they?
-We are going to listen and read a dialogue between Mi and Nick. They are talking on skype = a system that allows you to make telephone call using your computer
2. Listen and read
a).T. plays the recording the first time then ask ss to the family members Mi talks about.
? - Ss listen the second time and check the answers.


b)- Allow ss to read the conversation again and complete the sentences.
- Teacher gets feedback.



Apartment (n) c?n h?
Cousin (n) anh, em h?
living room (n) phng khch
bedroom (n) phng ng?
kitchen (n) phng b?p
bathroom (n) phng t?m
- Read in chorus.
- Answer the questions individually.

- look at the picture on page 30.
- They are playing computer.
playing games
using the internet.
- They are in their house/ room.


- Listen and give the answers.
- Listen and check the correct answers.

Grandparents

Uncle

Dad
V
Aunt
V
Mum
V
Cousin
V
Brother
V


- Work independently then share answer with their partner.
1: TV- sofa 4: noisy



II. Preposition
1.Prepositions of place ?
? Ask ss if they know the preposition in the box.
? Have ss do this exercise in pairs.
2. Ask ss to write the sentences individually then call 6 ss to write their answer on the board
3. -Explain some new words.
Pillow (n): ci g?i
Cap (n) : ci m?
Mouse (n): con chu?t
Let ss to look at the picture of the room and do ex.4 in pairs.
-Ask ss to correct the false sentences.
2: town house 5: three
3: sitting on the sofa
C: behind G: under
D: in
- Work individually.
Key:
1. F. The dog is between the bookshelf and the bed.
3. F. The clock is between the pictures.
4. F. The cat is in front of the computer.
5. F. The cap is next to the pillow.

4. Have ss look at the picture again and answer the questions.






III. Consolidation .
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework
?Write ex.5 in the notebook.
? Do exercises in the workboook.
? Prepare: Closer Look 1
- Answer the questions.
Key: 1. They are on the desk and the bookshelf
2. They are on the floor.
3. Yes. It is
4. No. they are on the bed
5. It's behind the bookshelf.
6. No, it isn't. It's next to the desk.
- Answer individually.


- Take note.

Adjustments:
???????????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????................

=============================================


Ngy so?n : 2/ 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 9/ 9/ 2016
Period 9: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I.Objectives
- Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to the topic "My home".
- Ss read the conversation between Mi and Nick again ,understand it then complete the sentence.
-Using the prepositions of place: in/on/behind/in front of/ between, behind, under/ next to.
II. Preparations.
-Teacher: Extra boards.
-Students: Prepare the new words, practice pronouncing these words




III. Procedures.
Teacher's and students' activities
Contents
1.Warm up. - To introduce the new lesson.
- Play a game : T asks Ss to draw their house with their imagination, don't care of the beauty.(1 minute)-One student goes to the board and draws, then name the rooms of the house.
- T checks with the whole class.
2. Presentation.
- T asks Ss to work in groups of 8 .T write the name of the rooms on the board, in different places.
3.Practice
? Ss in each group choose the number for their group? go to their group , discuss and run to the board as fast as he/she could to write the name of things.
-T tell the Ss which group is win.
-The whole class listen to the tape and repeat the words they hear.
-T can model this activity with a student. Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some pairs to practice in front of the class.




-Have some Ss read out the words first. Then play the recording for them to listen and repeat the words.
-T gives the way to pronounce these words in 3 ways.
4.Production.


-Ss do this exercise individually first then compare their answers with a partner.(One student goes to the board and write)
- T guides the way to do ,and asks Ss to practice.

5. Homework.
-Learn by heart the new words. Write 3 lines for each new word.
-Prepare the new lesson: Check dictionary these words: wall, a ceiling fan.
*VOCABULARY
/ Play a game : Drawing.
EX1. Name the rooms of the house.
a. living room b. bedroom c. attic
d. bathroom e. kitchen f. hall

EX2.Name the things in each room in 1.
1.living room: lamp, sofa?
2. bedroom: bed, lamp, picture?
3.kitchen:fridge,cupboard?
4.bathroom: bath, sink, toilet
5.hall: picture

EX3. Listen and repeat the words.
EX4.In pairs, ask and answer questions to guess the room.
T: What's in the room?
Oanh: A sofa and a television.
T: Is it the living room?
Oanh: Yes.
*/ PRONUNCIATION. /Z/ ; /S/; /IZ/
EX5+6. Listen and repeat the words. Then put the words in the correct column.
/z/
/s/
/iz/
posters
tables, beds,
wardrobes
lamps, sinks, toilets
fridges
EX7. Read the conversation below.
Underline the final s/es in the words and write / z /; /s/; /iz/
/z/ : things, pictures
/s/: lights, chopsticks
/IZ/ dishes, vases.
EX8: Listen to the conversation and repeat. Pay attention to /z/; /s/; and /IZ/ at the end of the words. Then practice the conversation with a partner.

Adjustments:
???????????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????.................
???????????????????????????????????................


=============================================


Ngy so?n : 9/ 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 16/ 9/ 2016
Period 10: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: A closer look 2

I.Objectives:
By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :
- review the structures THERE IS / ARE??.. to make sentenses.
- to discribe a room in a house.
II. Content
1. Vocabulary
Ceiling fan, cupboard, cooker , ceiling light
2. Structures
There is/isn't a picture in the wall.
There are/ aren't two lamps in the room
Is there a picture in the wall?
Are there two lamps in the room?


III. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities
IV. Procedures.

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
1.Warmmer. - Play agame : Brainstorming
Divide the class into two groups. Call each student in each group to go to the board to write words in turn in 2 mins. Which group having more words is the winner







Living room
- T gives remarks and marks for the winner.
- Group work:
Answer: living room
Kitchen
Bathroom?
????.
B. NEW LESSON
1. Presentation (10')
Vocabulary:

Ceiling fan (n)
cupboard(n) ( use pictures to present )
cooker (n)
ceiling light (n) (real thing)
<+>Checking: *Rubout and remember
Teacher prepares two pictures of two rooms with some furniture removed from the second.
Ask Ss to look at the two pictures and introduce the new structures:
Singular:
1st picture: There is a picture in the wall.
2nd picture: There isn't a picture in the wall.
Plural:
1st picture: There are two lamps in the room
2nd picture: There aren't two lamps in the room
Yes/No question:
Is there a sofa in the first picture?
-Yes, there is ( No, there isn't)
Are there any lamps in the second picture?
- Yes, there are (no, there aren't)
2. Practice:
Divide the class into 4 groups then guide each group to do their activities,
Group 1 does exercise number 1: Write is or are in each sentense.
Group 2 does exercise number 2:Write isn't or aren't into each sentence.
Group 3 does exercise number 3:Write positive sentences
Group 4 does exercise number 3: Write negative sentences.
Call Ss in each group to practice.

Exercise 4:
Let Ss look at the picture and complete the description about the kitchen in Mi's house (p 38)
- Call two students to read the text.
Exercise 5
Have Ss do this exercise individualy, then give the T the answers.
Exercise 6: Ask Ss to work in pairs then call some Ss to report their partner's answer to the class


Listen and write words in the note book.


Ceiling fan (n) qu?t tr?n
Cupboard (n) t? b?p
cooker (n) n?i c?m ?i?n
ceiling light (n) ?n tr?n



- Look at the pictures and make sentences about the two ones.
- Write down.











Do exercises in group.

Ex1+2
Key: 1- is/isn't 2- are/aren't
3- are/aren't 4- is/isn't
5- are/aren't
Ex 3:
There is/isn't a TV next to /on the table.
There is/isn't a brown dog in the kitchen.
????
There are/aren't lamps in the bedroom.

Complete the description:
Answer key:
1- is 2- is 3- are 4- are 5- aren't 6- isn't
Individual work
Example:
Are there two bathrooms in your house?
Pair work
Example:
Are there two bathrooms in your house?
Yes, there are./ No, there aren't.

Production:
Exercise 7
Ask Ss to work in pairs:
Teacher can model the conversation with a Student before Ss do this in pairs.
- Where's your room?
- What's your favorite room?
- Is there fridge in your room?
- Are there two lamps in your room?
Ask a good Ss to summarize their partners to the whole class.
Example:
I live in a small house in the city with my parents and my sister. There are 5 rooms in my house: a living room, a kitchen, a bathroom and two bed rooms. I like my room best. There is a ceiling light and .... There isn't a ceiling fan ........




Work in pair


- My room is on the second floor
- It's my bedroom.
- No, there isn't. It's in the kitchen
- No, there is one lamps and one ceiling lamp in my room?..
Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the work book and make sentenses with new words.
- Describe the room you like best.
- Prepare a new lesson : Communication
Do assigments.


Adjustments:
???????????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????.................








Ngy so?n : 10/ 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 18 / 9/ 2016
Period 11: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson : Communication

I.Objectives:
By the end of the lesson , students will be able to :
- review the grammar points: W-H questions (where/howmany?), there is/there are, preposition of place.
- discribe any rooms as well as houses.
II. Content
1. Vocabulary
Town house, countryhouse, villa, stilt house, apartment.
2. Structures: Review present simple and structures: There is/ are??
+ Where does Mi live? - She lives in a town house.
+ How many rooms are there in Mi's house? - There are 5 rooms in her house.
III. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities
IV. Procedures.
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. Warmmer
Chatting:
- Where do you live?
- Do you live in a big or small house?
- How many rooms are there in your house?
- Is there a garden in your house?
- Are there large windows in your room?
- Which room do you like best?
Individual work
Answer:

II. Presentation (15')
1- Pre- speaking
Extra vocabulary
-Have Ss guess the meaning of the vocabulary and tell Ss that this vocabulary will apear in the tasks that follow.
Town house:
Country house:
Villa (using pictrues to present)
Stilt house
Apartment = flat

-Ask Ss to look at the pictures about Mi's grandparents'house and complete the sentenses.
Play a game:-Devide the class into 4 groups of 8 students. Let them complete the text in turn. Which group doing the most quickly and having most correct answers is the winner.
- Let a good Ss descrbe Mi's grandparents'house.
T gives remarks and marks.
2- While- speaking:
- Ask Ss to look at the pictures of Nick's house and Mi's house on page 25 to find the difference between the two houses in pairs which has the most differences will be the winner




T looks at Nick's house and models with a student
-Nick lives in a country house. Where does Mi live?
-How many rooms are there in Mi's house?
???.
Ask Ss to work in pair not to look at each other's picture and make similar conversations.
Call a good St to describe Mi's house.
Give Ss 5- 7 minutes to draw a simple plan of the house on page 40. Then ask them to work in pair to tell each other about their house

3- Post - speaking:
Call some Ss to describe their friends house to the class.
Let Ss correct their friends' mistakes.
Give remarks and marks







Write new words into the notebooks

Town house: nh ? ph?
Country house: nh ? nng thn
Villa bi?t th?
Stilt house nh sn
Apartment = flat c?n h?



Group work
Exercise 1:
- Answer:
1- country 2- are 3- is 4- are
5- on 6- next to 7- on 8- is




Work in pairs to find the difference between Nick's house and Mi's house
Exercise 2
Nick's house Mi's house
- Small big
- A country house a town house
- trees no trees
- two windows many windows
?????
St: (look at Mi's house)
- She lives in a town house.


- There are 6 rooms. What about Nick's house? How many rooms are there?
???

Work in pairs


Individual work

Exercise 3
Draw the house and then practice in pair to tell the own house.


Exercise 4
- Individual work.

- correct the mistakes
III. Homework: Ask Ss to do exercises in the work book and make sentenses with new words.
- Describe your house.
- Prepare a new lesson : Skill 1


Do assigments at home.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
???????????????????????????????????....................


=============================================


Ngy so?n : 12 / 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 20 / 9/ 2016
Period 12: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson : Skills 1

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Read for specific information about rooms and houses.
- Ask about and describe houses, rooms, and furniture.
II. Contents:
- Vocab: home lexical items:
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books and projector.
- group work, individual work
IV.Procedures

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. Warm up
- Ask student to draw a simple plan of their house and call some students to describe their friend's house to the class

- Students work in individual then go to the board to describe their friend's house

B. NEW LESSON
I. Reading
1. Pre - reading
- Ask students to look at the pictures and the title on page 22 then decide what is the topic of the text
-Ask students to look at the text but not to read it then answer the questions
1- What type of text is it?
2- What is the title of this page? What is the topic?
3- Write three things you know about
Da Lat
- Confirm the answer to question 1 and 2
1. It's an email
2. The title is "A room at the Crazy House Hotel, Dalat ". The topic is Nick's weekend at the Crazy House Hotel.
2. While - listening:
-Ask students to read the text again and the questions
1. Is Nick with his brother and sister?
2. How many rooms are there in the hotel?
3.Why is the room called the Tiger room?
4. Where is his bag?
- Tell the class to underline parts of the e-mail that help them with the answers
( Set a strick time limit to ensure Ss read the information quickly)
- Ask Ss to give evidence when giving the answers
- Feedback and give the key
1. No, he isn't
2. There are ten rooms
3. Because there is a big tiger on the wall
4. It's under the bed
3. Post - reading:
-Ask Ss to do exercise 4 then compare their answer
- Check their answer then give the key
A window, a lamp, a tiger, a shelf, a desk





- Look at the pictures and the title on page 22 then think about the topic of the text

- Quickly look at the text and answer
the questions





- Read the the text again to check their ideas





- Read the text in detail to answer the questions





-Compare their answers with
their partners




- Copy the correct answer






- Find the things in the room
- Compare their answer with their partner
- Check and correct their answer
II. Speaking.
1.Pre- speaking:
- Ask Ss to answer the question: What is there in your rooms?
2.While - speaking:
- Ask each Ss to create a new room for the hotel and draw a plan of the room
- Ask each Ss to show the plan to their
partner and describe their room in pairs

3.Post - speaking
- Ask three students to show their partner's plan to the whole class and describe it
- Ask Ss to choose the best plan


- Work in pair to answer the question
There is a bed , ........



-Think about a new room for the hotel and draw a plan of the room

- Work in pair to describe their room

-Listen and remark


- Vote for the best plan
C. HOMEWORK.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.

- Create a new room for your house
And describe it
-Prepare new lesson: Skill 2

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
???????????????????????????????????....................



Ngy so?n : 13 / 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 21 / 9/ 2016
Period 13: Unit 2: MY HOME
Lesson 2: Skill 2

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen and read for specific information about rooms and houses.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My home ".
- write an e-mail to a friend.
II. Contents:
- Vocab: home lexical items:
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work
IV.Procedures

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. Warm up
- give some home lexical items and ask ss to put them into suitable groups: lamp, bed, cupboard,dishwasher,shower, table, chairs, ceiling fan, sink, television, picture, cooker.

- Students work in groups then go to the board and write ( a word can be used more than once)
living room
bedroom
kitchen
bathroom
table
....
bed
...
cupboard
...
sink
...


B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening
1. Presentation (10')
Vocabulary:
fireplace (n) ( use pictures to present )
wardrobe (n)
? Look at the picture in your books! Ask and answer about the things in the picture

2. Pre - listening:
* Set the sence:
Nick's mother are on holiday. They are describing their room at the hotel.
Prediction:? Before you listen to their description, I want you to guess where each thing is.
* some key words / phrases in the tape script:
. actually ( adv): thc s
. far corner: gc xa
. right in front of: ngay pha trc
3. While - listening:
- play the tape script



-correct their drawing.
4. Post - listening:
-let ss practice speaking by describing the room.

-remark and give ss marks





- look at the pictures and give the meanings of new words.
- copy and practice reading 2 new words.
- What is this ?
+ It's a table.


-hang the poster of the room.
-students go to the board and stick a piece of paper of thing on the poster.


- copy
-practice reading



-listen to the tape script for the first time
-check their prediction
-listen to the tape script for the second time
to draw the furniture in the correct place.



-begin with: This is a big room in the hotel...
( there is a big fireplace near the door. The shelves are right in front of the window...)
II. Writing.
1.Pre-writing:
Show ss a sample of an e-mail ( use Nick's e-mail as an sample), then give questions:
+ How many part are there in an e-mail?
+ What are they?

+ What should we write in each part?

-give ss the form of an e -mail
-Hang the poster of Writing tip on the board.
-Ss study the Writing tip and may ask some information.
2.While -writing:
- ask ss to look at Nick's e-mail again to identify the subject, greeting, introduction, body and conclusion
- Give the correction.


-ask ss to correct the e-mail to Nick, focus on the puntuation and capitalisation rules ss learnt in unit 1.
- correct.
2.While -writing: Write an e-mail to Nick,telling him about your idea for the new room of the Crazy House Hotel.
-Explain the precess of writing which ss have to follow:
+ P (plan): Brainstorm vocabulary about
+ D (draft)
+ C (check) : check dictation, puntuation, capitalisation, parts.
-Tell Ss to pay attention to punctuation, structural elements, linking words?





+ There are 5 parts.
+ They are : the subject line, greeting, introduction, body and conclusion ( students can answer this question in Vietnamese)
+( Students' answers )


+ give some ways of asking about his / her health.
+ copy into their notes.



+ Subject: weekend away!
+ Greeting: Hi Phong
+ Introduction: How are you ...
+ Body : Da lat is nice... at home
+ Conclusion: See you soon!
+ Ss work in pairs then go to the borad and write their answers.
+ write in the notebooks.
+ read Mi's e-mail again.


-listen and copy
-work in groups ( if less time, ss can work at home)
(students' work)


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.

C. HOMEWORK
-Finish an e-mail to Nick.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????..
??????????????????????????????????......................
???????????????????????????????????...................


============================================

Preparing date: 15 / 9/ /2016
Preparing date: 24/9/2016
Unit 2: MY HOME
Period 15: Looking back

I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- Ss revise the grammar points:
+ prepositions of place
+ There is / are...
+ home lexical items
- practice writing and speaking by asking and describing a room, a house ?
II. Contents:
- Vocab: home lexical items:
- Grammar: + prepositions of place
+ There is / are
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, pictures and projector.
- Method: group work, individual work
IV.Procedures
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. WARM-UP
- use exercise 1 in the page 46 to warm up
-have Ss work in 2 teams.







-correct and give remark
-Group competition game: let ss in two team add more words to each group. The group that can add more word to the list and finish first in the winner.
+ Types of building: cottage, hotel,...
+ Rooms: dinning room, rest room, guestroom, reeding room(hall)...
+ Furniture: stool, clock...

-ss work in groups.
-go to the board and write their answers
Types of building
Rooms
Furniture
Villa,apartments, town house, stilt house, country house
Living room, hall, atlic, bedroom, kitchen
Picture, cupboard, chest of drawers, wardrobe, sofa, dishwasher, desk

B. NEW LESSON.
* Set the sence: You have revised vocabulary related to the topic " My house" , but to describe a house you have to use prepositions of place.
-ask ss to give prepositions of place they have learnt
* exercise 2
-ask ss to do exercise 2.


- Correct mistakes if necessary







* exercise 3
? Name the furniture in the picture and its amount




-let ss compare their answers with their partners.
-ask students to complete sentences using there is / are / isn't / aren't


-correct
* exercise 4
-Ask ss to turn the sentences in exercise 3 into questions with:
Is there a.... ?
Are there ......?


-remark and give marks
* exercise 5 : Write six sentences to describe your bedroom.
-correct if necessary.
* Communication
-ask ss to draw a cat in the house in the book. Ask antoher st to ask questions to find the cat.
-model the way to ask and answer.
-go around and observe ss working.
-correct if necessary

in next to

beside
on

behind
- read the prepositions of place aloud.
-do exercise individually.
-write sentences in their notes then go to the board and write one by one.
Key:
1.The boy is on the table.
2.The dog is in front of the kennel.
3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the sofa.
4.The cat is behind the computer.
5.The girl is in the armchair.
6.The boy is next to the armchair.

+ a clock
+ a desk
+ many books
+ a laptop
+ a poster
+ a small plant
+ a lamp...
-give the way of using:
There is / isn't + singular nouns
There are / aren't + plural nouns
-Ss do exercise individually then compare their answer with their partners
-go to the borad and write their answers.


Make questions abd answers:
-Is there a clock on the wall?
+ Yes, there is.
-Are there two small plants in the corner?
+ No, there aren't.
-ss practice asking and answering.
-Ss do exercise individually. If possible , ask ss to go to the board and write their answers.

-ss read the sample of dialogue.
-draw a cat the work in groups.

-practice asking and answering( focus on using prepositions of place )
C. HOMEWORK.
-Asign home work.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 3- Getting Started.


Adjustments:
???????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????..

Ngy so?n : 18 / 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 28 / 09/ 2016
Period 19: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 4: Skills 1
I. Objectives
- Reading the advertisement and Phuc's e-mail to understand The superb summer camp.
- Training reading and speaking skills.
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- T calls 2 Ss to tell about their friends.

A. OLD LESSON.
"Describe about your friend"
-Present some new words.
-Ss repeat and copy them.

-Check ROR.










-Ask Ss to read the advertisement and do ex 1.
-Explain any words that Ss do not know.



B. NEW LESSON
I. READING
1. Vocabulary
- superb (a): tuy?t v??i
- last (v): ke?o da?i
- attach (v): da?n (nha?n)
- campfire: ?m l??u tra?i
- treasure: chu ba?u, ?i?u quy? gia?.
- butter: b?
- yet: v?n ch?a
2. Choose the best answer. (Ex 1)
1. The camp is for kids aged between??.
a. 6-9 b. 10-15 c. 18-19
2. The camp is in the??.
a. sea b. city park c. mountains
3. The camp last for?..days.
a. three b. four c. five.




-Ss quickly look at the text then answer the questions.
- Explain the features of e-mails: format, greeting, ending.







- Ss read the text again and decide T or F

- Ss do the activity 4 then compare their answers with the partner.




- T checks the answers


3. Read and answer the questions.(Ex2)
1. Is the text a letter, an e-mail or a blog?
2. What is the text about?
3. Is Phuc enjoying himself ?
Key: 1. an e-mail
2. A stay at Superb summer Camp.
3. Yes, he is.
4.Read the text again then write T or F(Ex3)
1. Phuc is writing to his teacher.
2. Phuc has four new friends.
3. Phuc thinks Nhung is kind.
4. Phuc likes scary stories.
5. In the evening, the kids are playing inside.
6. They are working on a milk farm tomorrow.
7. The children can speak Vnamese at the camp.
Key: 1. F ( he's writing to his parents) 2. F (He has three)
4. F (He hopes it isn't too scary)
5. F (They are having a campfire and telling stories)
6. F ( They are visiting a milk farm)
7. F ( They speak E only)


-Ask Ss to make their own schedule then report their results to the class.
II. SPEAKING.
* Make your own English camp schedule

Morning
Afternoon
Day one


Day two


Day three



-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
Home work
- Learn by heart new vocab.
-Do exercises in work book.
-Prepare new lesson- Skill 2.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????.......................
Ngy so?n : 25 / 09 / 2016
Ngy d?y: 03 / 10 / 2016
Period 20: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 5: Skills 2
I. Objectives
- Listening to understand more about The Superb Summer Camp.
- Writing a plan for 4 Teen magazine.
II. Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct

A. WARM-UP: Network
"Activities in a summer camp."
- taking part in cooking competition
- Doing "treasure hunt"
- Playing traditional games.
-?.


Pre
-Present some new words.





-Ask Ss to look at the photos to match the words in the box.

While

-Play the recording for checking and practicing reading the words.







-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen then fill in the table. Share their ideas together.
- Play the recording the final time then check their answers.
B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Vocabulary
- hike : ?i b? ????ng da?i
- ski: tr???t tuy?t
- research (v): nghin c??u
- draft (v): vi?t nha?p
- check (v): ki?m tra
- introduce (v): gi??i thi?u
2. Prediction. (Ex1)

3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
a. hiking
b. taking part in the cooking competition.
c. skiing
d. visiting a milk farm.
e. taking part in an art workshop.
f. riding a bike.
g. taking a public speaking class.
h. playing beach volleyball.
i. playing traditional games.
4. Listen to Mr Lee then complete the table.

Morning
Afternoon
Day Two
Doing a treasure hunt
Visiting a milk farm and..(1)....
Day Three
........(2).........
.......(3)........
Key:
1. taking a public speaking class
2. Taking part in the "Kids Cook" contest.
3. Having a pool party.



-Tell the class three letters can help them to write better: R-D-C.
-Hang the poster on the board.

-Ss study the Study Skills and may ask some information.


-Ask Ss to use the notes below and then guide them how to write a plan for this weekend with their friends.



-Ss write their plans.
- Go around and Correct some


II. Writing.
1. Study Skills.
Research, draft, check
Research: Make notes and brainstorm ideas.
Find or draw pictures to add to your writing.
Draft: Then write the first draft.
Check: Check your draft. Can you improve it? Write it out again.
2. Practice.
* Activity 4
+ Introduce yourself;
Decribe yourself - think about your appearance and personality.
+ Describe your friends
Write about your friends - think about the appearance and personality.
+ Describe your plans:
What do you plan to do together this weekend?


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
C. HOMEWORK
-Learn by heart new words
-Finish the plans at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
???????????????????????????????????....................

Ngy so?n : 30 / 9/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 06 / 10/ 2016

Period 21: Unit 3: MY FRIENDS
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK

I. Objectives
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review adjectives of personality and the grammar points: present continuous for future.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

-Have Ss work in 3 teams.
-Ss write as many words as possible.
A. WARM-UP.
[

- Ss look at the pictures and do this exercises T asks some Ss to write the sentences on the board
- T checks Ss's answers .





-Ss do this exercise individually then compare their answers with a partner
T checks Ss's answers


-Ss do this exercise individually then compare their answers with a partner
T checks Ss's answers


-Ss do this exercise individually then compare their answers with a partner
T checks Ss's answers


-T models the way to to ask and answer with a student , then divide Ss into groups . Ss work in group and take turn to draw a cat in the house in the book . Other students ask questions to find the cat
T goes around to observe Ss working , correct their mistakes and discuss them with the whole class .
B. NEW LESSON.
II. Grammar
* Activity 2 (individual)
KEY:
1.The boy is on the table
2.The dog is in front of the kennel
3.The cat is between the bookshelf and the sofa
4.The cat is behind the computer
5.The girl is in the armchair
6.The boy is next to the armchair
*Activity 3.
KEY :
1 there is 2. There are
3. There is 4. There aren't
5. There is 6. There aren't
* Activity 4
1. Is there a clock on the wall?
2. Are there books on the bookshelf?
3. ?????????????
*Activity 5.
Eg:
-There is a big clock on the wall.
-There are two pictures beside the clock.
-?..

III. Communication
Eg:
A: Where is the cat?
B: Is it on the bed?
A: No, it isn't.
C: Is it under the table?
B: Yes, it is.

- One of the Ss in the group asks other group members question 1 and fills the information in the following table



-This Student then summarizes their group members' answers and reports the results to the whole class
- Ss draw their own crazy house and tell the group about their house . Alternatively , each group can draw a crazy house together then tell the class about their house . The class vote for the best crazy house . If there is no time left , this part can be done at home as homework
C. PROJECT

*Activity 1 :

1. Which house do you want to live ? Why ?
House
A
B
C
D
Name




Reasons




*Activity 2 :

-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
D. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 3 - Getting Started.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
???????????????????????????????????....................





Ngy so?n : 01 / 10 / 2016
Ngy d?y: 14 / 10/ 2016

Period 22+23: Review 1
I. Objectives
- Revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practised since unit 1.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, cassette.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final- s/es.
Ex 1:
- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the answer.
- T corrects and give the correct answers.
Ex 2:
- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of school things and furniture in the house which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The pair that finds the most words will go to the board and write their answers .
- Asks other to add any more words.

II. Vocabulary:
EX 3 :
- Ss do ex 3 individually
- Asks Ss to share their answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board and write down the answers.
- Checks Ss'answers and give the correct answers.




EX 4: Crossword puzzle
- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword.


Ex 5: Choose the correct words.
- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually.
- Ss give the correct answers.
- T corrects and give correct answers

III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the present continuous.

Ex 6:
- Asks Ss to do ex6.
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board, others do it on their notebook.
- Checks Ss' answers

Ex 7:
- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention to the hints, do exercise individuallyand compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss' answers and gives the correct answers.

Ex 8:
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

Ex9:
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the conversation

IV. Skills:
1. Reading:
- Ss do ex1,2 individually.
- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews the other two about what they like and dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members' answers in the table and report them to the class, then summerises Ss'ideas.

3. Listening :
Ex 4 :
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5:
- Ss read the questions quickly.
- T plays the recording again and answer the questions
- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.


4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail on the board
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework :
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the test 1.



* Key :
1D 2C 3C 4A 5B










/ b / : book, bag, bed ......
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...






1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Play: sports, badminton
- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.

Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter
Down : 2. dining room 4. hall


1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
4. patient 5. sporty.






1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping 5.is




1. is 2. isn't 3. doesn't have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is










6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4





Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
Ex 2 : 1. it's in a quiet place not far from....
2. They're hard-working and serious.
.............













kitchen - garden - living room - bedroom.





1. She's watering the plants in the garden.
2. He's listening to the radio
3. He's inMi's bedroom.
4. She's watching TV.








- Write homework on their notebook.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
Ngy so?n : 10 / 10 / 2016
Ngy ktra: 17 / 10/ 2016

Period 24: Test 1

I. M?c ?ch yu c?u:
1. ??c hi?u :
??c ?o?n v?n l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng sai, tr? l?i cu h?i d?a vo n?i dung bi h?c.
2. Vi?t:
Bi?t s? d?ng c?u trc v ng? php s?p x?p cc t? ? cho thnh cu hon ch?nh.
3. Nghe :
Nghe ?o?n v?n ch?n ?p n ?ng / sai theo n?i dung bi nghe.
4. Ki?n th?c ngn ng? :
Bi?t phn bi?t cch pht m c?a t?, s? d?ng ki?n th?c ng? php ? h?c ?? chia ??ng t? v l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng.
II. Chu?n b? :
Bi photo.
III. Ma tr?n :




C?p ??
t? duy



T?ng
Ch? ??

Nh?n
bi?t
Thng
hi?u
V?n
d?ng



TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL

Language
Pho


4
1.0



4
1.0
focus
Vocab
6
3.0





6
3.0

Gram



4
2.0


4
2.0
Reading




4
1.0


4
1.0
Writing






4
2.0
4
2.0
Listening

4
1.0





4
1.0
T?ng

10
4.0

12
4.0


4
2.0
26
10.






IV. ?? bi :
A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M:
Question 1: Which underlined part is pronouced differrently in each line? Choose and circle A,B,C or D. ( 1p )
1. A. go B. post C. come D. hope
2. A. beds B. dogs C. porters D. books
3. A. pictures B. watches C. buses D. toothbrushes
4. A. homework B. mother C. open D. judo
Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )
1. Kitchen is a ?? in a house.
A. furniture B. room C. building
2. A clock is ??. the wall.
A. in B. at C. on
3. I ??. football every afternoon.
A. play B. do C. have
4. What's your favourite ??. , Nam ? - Music.
A. food B. subject C. drink
5. Hai is very ??. . She always on the phone, chatting to friends.
A. talkative B. shy C. kind
6. ??.. my shoes ? - They're under the bed.
A. what B. How C. Where
B- PH?N T? LU?N :
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 2ps)
1. She ( speak ) ?????? English very well.
2. What ?????you ( do) ????? now ? - I ( read ) ?????? book.
3. They ( not go ) ????????. to the theater this evening.
Question 2: Read the text.( 1p)
She's Nga. She lives in a country house with her parents and sister . Her house is not very big. There are 6 rooms in her house : a living room, three bedrooms, a bathroom and a kitchen. Her bedroom is between her parents' room and the kitchen. It's small but she likes it.
A. Read the text again and write True (T) or false (F).( 6B )
1. Nga lives in a town.
2. She lives with her grandparents.
3. Her house isn't very big.
4. Her bedroom is next to the bathroom.
B. Answer the following questions: ( 6A )
1. Where does Nga live ?
2. How many rooms are there in her house?
3. Is her house is very small ?
4. Does she like her house ?
Question 3: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 2ps )
1. is / in / there / sofa / front / a / you / of .
2. you / the / door / can / please / open ?
3. there / bookshelf / the / are / on / books ?
4. go / with / like / out / you / to / me / would ?
Question 4 : Listen and write True (T) or false (F) ( 1p )
Hi. My name is Susie Brewer. I'm eleven years old. I'm now in grade 6 at PLC Sysney. I like it here, as I like to study in girl's school. The teacher at my school are nice and very helpful, and my favourite teacher is Mrs Susan McKeith. She teaches us maths. I have three hours to study Vietnamese in the afternoon. Usually I do my homework at breaktime. We wear our uniform everyday,but today we aren't, as we are going to have an outing to Taronga Zoo.
1. Susie Brewer is 11 years old.
2. Now She is in grade 8.
3. She has three hours to study English in the afternoon.
4. She does her homework at breaktime.
V. ?p n v thang ?i?m ch?m:

A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M :
Question 1: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. speaks 2. are? doing - am reading 3 aren't going
Question 2: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn't
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
Ngy so?n : 14/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 21/ 10/ 2016
Period 25: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 1: Getting Started
Lost in the old town
I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can
- Know some vocabulary about places, derections
- Use suguestions
- Read for specific information about good things in the neighbourhood
- Talk about different places and show directions to these in a neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
II. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board
- Look through the picture and remember some things in it
I. Warm up:
Kim's game ( 2 groups)
Pre - teach
-Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about the picture
Where are Nick , Khang and Phong?
What might be happening to them? What are they doing?
-Have you ever got lost? Where and when?
How did you feel then? What did you do?
- Elicits the new words using pictures and explaination
+ Check vocabulary : R O R
-Play the recording. Ss listen and read.Pause the recording at the appropriate places if Ss need with comprehension questions.
-Ss work independently. Allow them to share answers before discussing as a class.
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation to find the phrases. Practice saying them together( play the recording again as a model if necessary)


_ First, model the role- play with a more able St. Then ask pairs to role- play the short conversations before demonstrating the class.
II. New lesson.
A. Getting Started.
1. Vocabulary:
- excited (a): ph?n ch?n, kh?ch ?ng
- exciting (a): th? v?, h?ng th?, k?ch ?ng
- historic (a): c? k?n,c?
- lost (a): l?c, b? l?c
- memorial (n): ?i t??ng ni?m
- cathedral (n) : Nh th? l?n


2. Listen and read:


1a: Read and put the actions in order
KEY: 2 5 3 4 1 6
1b: Making suggestions. Put the words in the correcct order.
KEY: 1.a.Where shall we go first?
b. Let's go to " Chua cau"
2.a. Shall we go by bicycle?
b. Ok, sure.
3.a.Shall we go by bicycle?
b. No, let's walk there.
Form: Shall we vinf....
Let's
Practice:2Role play making suggestions




-Ss work in groups.Ss match the picture with the places
- Correct.




3. Match the places below with the pictures. Then listen, check and repeat the works.
1 E- Square: Qu?ng tr??ng
2H -palace: Cung ?i?n
3 F -cathedral: Nh th? l?n
4C -memorial: ?i t??ng ni?m
5 G- art gallery: Tri?n lm tranh
6 A- statue: T??ng
7 B -railway station: Ga tu
8D- temple: Mi?u th?
-First, model this activities with a more able Ss. Ask Ss to work in pairs. Call some pairs to practise in front of the class.


_ Have Ss quickly match each instruction with the diagram. Check their answer.
Translation ( weak student)
Ask some additional questions( strong Students)




- Demonstrate the game to the class first. Ask a more able S to help. Then Ss play in pairs
4. Think about where you live
Ex: A: Is there a theatre in your neighbourhood?
B: Yes, There is/ No, There isn't
5. Match the instructions in the box with the pictures.
1. Go straing on. 2.turn left at traffic lights. 3. Go past the bus stop. 4.Take the first turning on the left./Take the first left.
5.Go to the end of the roard. 6 Go along the street. 7 Cross the street.
6. Game : Give your partner directions to one of the places on the map, guess then swap
EX; A : Go straight. Take the second turning on theleft. It's on your right.
B: Is that the art gallery?
A: Yes,it is/ No, try again
-Sumarize and review the lesson.
-Prepare closer look 1.
III. Home work.
Learn the new words + Do exercises
-Prepare closer look 1.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 15/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 22/ 10/ 2016
Period 26: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 2: A closer look1

I. TEACHING POINTS
By the end of the lesson, Ss can:
- use vocabulary and structures about people and places ( adjectives opposite)
- pronounce 2 sounds: /i:/ and /i/
II. Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

- Decribe the pictures using adjectives

I. Warm up:
2 groups: Write the words as much as possible.

- Elicits the new words using pictures and explaination



+ Check vocabulary : practice saying the adjectives with Ss. Then ask Ss to write the correct adjectives in the blanks. Play the
record as many times as reqired to allow them to check their answers , support their pronunciation.
- Explain the contents in " Watch out!" carefully to the Ss. T may take some more examples to illustrate. Ask Ss to do the vocabulary exercise individually. Check with the whole class. When checking, ask Ss to refer to 1 to make the meanings of
the opposites clearer to them

First model this activity with a more able S. Remind Ss that they only use the adjectives they have learnt in 1 and 2 to talk about their village, town or city.Then Ss works in pairs. Call some pairs to practise in front of class.
II. New lesson.
A. Vocabulary.
- narrow(a): h?p >< wide
- Fantastic : tuy?t v?i, tuy?t di?u
- convenient: ti?n l?i
- polluted: b? nhi?m
-peaceful: yn bnh, thanh t?nh
1. Fill in each blank with one word
from the box. Listen then check, repeat the words.
2. convenient 3.boring 4.polluted. 5. historic 6.narrow 7. noisy
2. " Watch Out": Sometimes words can have two or more opposites: noisy- quiet/ peaceful. some words don't have opposite : polluted
KEY: boring-exciting; historic-modern
noisy- quiet/peaceful. convenient-inconvenient; fantastic-terrible.

3.Work in pair.......
Ex: A: Is your neighbourhood polluted?
B: No, it isn't
A: Is it peaceful?
B: Yes, it is



- T asks some Ss to read out the words first , then plays the recording for them to listen and repeat the words.

- Ss listen and distinguish /i:/ and /i/






- T asks Ss to circle the words while they listen .
- Ss compare their answers in pairs before T checks their answers with the whole class


-Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat sentence by sentence. Help them to recognize the sounds and the rhythm.
-Ss practise the chant by dividing the class into two groups.
Have groups sing alternate lines
B. Pronuciation
/i:/ and /i/
4. Listen and repeat.
exciting cheap historic sleepy expensive convenient peaceful police
noisy friendly

/i:/
/i/
cheap sleep peaceful convenient police
historic exciting expensive noisy
friendly


5. Listen then circle the words you hear.
Key.
1. living 7. teams
2. heat 8. chip
3. seats
4. sheep
5. tins
6. mill
6. Listen and repeat the chant. Notice the sounds /i:/ and /i/.




-Summarize the main points of the lesson..
III. Home work.
Learn the new words
-Review the lesson.
-Prepare closer look 2.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 19/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 26/ 10/ 2016
Period 27: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 3: A closer look2

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can focus on comparative adjective forms
II. Teaching aids: Poster, CD record &cassettes, pictures.
II. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

- Decribe the pictures using adjectives

I. Warm up:
2 groups: Write the words as much as possible.
T introduces the subject of the lesson : comparative adjectives and give the rule.

II. New lesson.
A. Grammar
* Short adjectives: one or two syllable(s)
S1 + V + adj + er than + S2
( fast- faster; large- larger; noisy- noisier; hot- hotter)
* Long adjectives: two, three or more syllables
S1 + V + more adj + than + S2
( modern- more modern; expensive- more expensive...)
REMEMBER;: Irregular adjectives
- good/ well ? better ; bad ? worse
- many / much ? more little ?less
- far ?farther / further



Ask Ss to read the instructions. Tell Ss what they should do. Then have Ss compair
their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.
- Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the example to show ss what should do. Then have Ss compair their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.


- Ask Ss to read and complete the sentences individually. remind them to pay attention to the number of the syllables in each adjective. Compare their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class.

- T elitcits . Write sentences compare the two the neighbourhood. Compare in pairs .then saying to the whole class.
- Feedback.


Ask Ss to read the instructions. Use the example to show ss what should do. Then have Ss compair their answers in pairs before checking with the whole class


-First model this activity with a more able S. Remind Ss that they only use the information they have written in 4 to ask and answer questions about the two neighbourhood.Then Ss works in pairs. Call some pairs to practise in front of class.
- Ask Ss think of the places that they've been to.Model this activity with a more able St.Then Ss works in pairs. T goes around the class and monitors. Ask a few pairs with the most imaginative ideas to report them to the class.
B.Practice:
1. Complete the following sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in th brackets.
KEY: 2. taller 3. bigger 4. noisier 5.cheaper

2 Now complete the following sentences with the comparative form of the long adjectives in brackets
KEY: 2 more beautiful 3. more convinient 4. more interesting 5 more expensive.

3. Read and complete Vy's letter to her friend.
KEY: 1 drier 2 smaller 3 older 4 wider
5 more delicious
6 cheaper
4. Look at the pictures of Yen Binh neighbourhood and LangSon neighbourhood . Now write about the differences.
Ex: Yen Binh is more crowed than Lang Son.
5.Complete the following sentences with the comparative form of the adjectives in brackets
KEY: 2 more expensive
3 more comfortable
4 more historic 5 narrower
6.Work in pairs. .....
EX: A: Is Yen Binh more crowded than Lang Son?
B: Yes, It is
A: Is Lang Son more modern than Yen Binh?
B: No, it isn't.
7. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the places that you know...
Ex: Is Hue busier than Da Nang?
No , it isn't

-Summarize the main points of the lesson..
III. Home work.
Learn the new words
-Review the lesson.
-Prepare comunication.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 21/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 28/ 10/ 2016
Period 28: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 4: Comunication
I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- Listen for specific information about directions to some places in a neighbourhood.
- Talk about different places, use connective words and some expressions to give
directions to these places in the neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board


T: Show pictures to teach new words.
Ss: Have a look at the pictures and guess the meanings of thhe new words.

-Ask Ss to write anything they know about Hoi An.

I. Warm up:
Brainstorming
Cao l?u Many old houses

Cha C?u
World heritage An ancient town

- give some new words.



* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R

Play the recording. First,Ss to listen only.
- Play the recording again and allow Ss to fill in the gaps as they listen.
- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs, before playing the recording a final time to allow the pairs to check their answers.
- Ask Ss to read the audio guide again, paying attention to the use of the connective words: first(ly), second(ly), then and finally
II. New lesson.
1/ New words:
- first : tr??c tin
- then : ti?p theo , r?i th?
- after that : sau ?
- finally : cu?i cng
- to guide : h??ng d?n
- be famous for : n?i ti?ng v?
- direction (n): ph??ng h??ng
- Sa Huynh Culture:n?n v?n ha Sa Hu?nh
2/ Act1: Listen and fill in the gaps.

1. historic 2. covenient 3 straight 4 second 5.left 6 right 7 second 8 next to.




Ask Ss to read the brief information about London and Ho Chi Minh City and look carefully at the two simplified maps of the two cities.
- Elicit additional information about the two cities from Ss, then ask Ss to read the
- Ask Ss some more questions to check if they know what they are supposed to do.
- Remind Ss of the expressions they can use to give directions. ( Ss may refer to the expressions in the dialogue and exercise 5 of Getting started.)
- Have Ss prepare their audio guide individually and then share it with apartner.
- Ask Ss to practice presenting their audio guide in pairs or in groups.




- Elicit information about Da Nang from Ss.

- Ask Ss to prepare their audio guide individually and then share it with partner.


- Have Ss present their audio guide to the class.
3/Act 2: Create an audio guide for a city
instructions carefully.

Ho Chi Minh City

London
4/ Act 3:Create an audio guide for Da Nang City.
Give the city fact file:DNCity: one of the largest cities in VN; on the river Han, Ngu Hanh Son Mountains, wide and clean streets, many beautiful beaches& bridges.


-Summarize the main points of the lesson..
III. Home work.
- Learn the new words
- Write the audio guide into your notebook
-Review the lesson & prepare skill 1.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 22/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 29/ 10/ 2016
Period 29: Test correction
I. Nh?n xt bi lm c?a h?c sinh.
II. ??a ra ?p n .
A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M :
Question 1: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. speaks 2. are? doing - am reading 3 aren't going
Question 2: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn't
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1T 2F 3F 4T

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................


Ngy so?n : 22/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 2/ 11/ 2016
Period 30: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 4: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a blog for specific information about good things and bad things in a neighbourhood.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board
- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang's neighbourhood is?
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?
I. warm up
Ss look at the picture of Khang's neighbourhood. Answer individually'
- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these words in the pasage.
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of the words in the context.



T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions.
-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.
-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.
-T corrects the answers:


_ Ss scan the passage again and find the information to complete the table.
_ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
_ Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
_ T checks and corrects it
II. New lesson
A. Reading:
1. Vocabulary:
Suburb (n): ngo?i
Backyard (n): sn sau
Incredibly (adj): vcng, th?t ng?c nhin
Beach (n): bi bi?n
(to) dislike: khng thch
2. Anwer the questions:
* Key:
1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
2/ Because it has beautiful parks and sandy beaches and fine weather.
3/ They are very friendly.
4/ Because there're many modern buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
Like
- It's great for outdoor activities.
- There's almost everything here.
- Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
- People are incredibly friendly.
- The food is very good.




T reviews the expressions they can use to give directions.






T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering questions about the locations on the map.
-T may model this activity with a good student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their dialogues in front of the class.
B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the map of Khang's neighbourhood and give directions:
Directions:
1. Go straight on
2. Turn left ...
3. Go past?
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
6. Go along
7. Cross
T: Can you tell us the way to the market?
S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street. Then take the second turning on the left.
After that go straight . It's on your left.
5/ Ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places in your city.

Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
Homework:
-Practice reading comprehension a blog.
Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 2.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................






Ngy so?n : 28/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 4/ 11/ 2016
Period 31: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the conversation between a stranger and Duy' Dad
- Writing a paragraph about what SS like or dislike their neighbour hood.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents
- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct

A. WARM-UP: Network
"Decribe your neighbourhood"



Pre
-Present some new words.






-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words.(EX1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get the places mumbered 1-4 from the You are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and completing the missing words in the dialogue.
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers. Share their ideas together.
- Play the recording the final time then check their answers.
B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Vocabulary
super market: siu th?
cafe': c ph
secondary school: tr??ng c?p 2
lower secondary school : tr??ng c?p 1
sandy: ct
office: v?n phng, c? quan

2. Prediction. (Ex1)





3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school


EX2.Choose the correct places
1.A 2C 3F 4D



-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
-Hang the poster on the board.
- Share their answers with partners

-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or dislike about living in their neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations Share with their partners. T may read out the notes from some more able Ss to the whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their ideas
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T comments.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
1. sandy beaches
2.heavy tracffice......
8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
* Activity 4. Make notes about your neighbourhood, think about the things you like or dislike about it
Like
Dislike



* Act 5: Write a paragragh about your neighbourhood saying what you like or dis like about living there. Use the information in 4, and Khang'blog as a model.
I'd like to tell you some good things and some bad things about living in my neighbourhood.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
C. HOMEWORK
-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................










Ngy so?n : 29/ 10/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 5/ 11/ 2016
Period 32: Unit 4: My neighborhood
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four


- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity














-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.

B. Grammar
- Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
- Activity 4 KEY
adj
comparative form
fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
large
quiet
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting
larger
quieter
- Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather ..is/ are?
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................


Ngy so?n : 2/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 9/ 11/ 2016
Period 33: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the netural and describe them
+/ Making and
+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-Before Ss open their books, review the previous Unit focus on the key language and structures learnt.
- Write the unit title on the board "geography club " explain the meaning of surprise and asks Ss to guess what the picture might be about . Let Ss open their books and check their answers.
2. Presentation.
- T can also Ss to share any recent experiences of going on a picnic.
Play the recording
ss listen and read.
3. Practice.
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation to find the phrases
- Practice saying them together
- Pay attention to intonation when asking questions
- Ask pairs to role-play the short conversations before demonstrating for the class
- Demonstrate the game to the class first.







- Ask Ss label the pictures.

- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1 again . tick the words you can find.

4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.


Ask Ss questions about the picture
eg: How many people are there?
What are they doing?





1. Listen and read.
*/ New words.
- desert | d??z??t |
- waterfall | ?w??t?f??l |
- valley | ?vli |
- island | ?a?l?nd |

a Answer the following questions
1- Vy is
2- She went to the wrong room
3- Uluru
4- Australia
5- An island
b.Classroomlanguage
1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?
c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople use these sentences.Then role-play the situations with a partner.
2. Listen and repeat the following words
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley

3. Now label the pictures.
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach
9- island 10- valley

4. Read the conversation in 1 again . tick the words you can find.


Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................














Ngy so?n : 5/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 12/ 11/ 2016
Period 34: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items
+/ Pronunciation /t/ and /st/
+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-vocabulary
Travel items
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
desert, mountain.....
- Do I need a backpack in the desert?
- Why do you think so?

2. Presentation.

Ss listen and read.

3. Practice.
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with Ss.

- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
- Clicit ideas for sentense1.
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining sentences.
-Check their ideas at the end.

- Remind ss that in the introduce they thought about useful things for a beach,desert , mountain...
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday and they need to order the otems from very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8)

- Practice sounding out the sound
/t/ and /st/ together
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the words in the order they hear them.
- Play the recroding again

4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.




5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.


- Bring some travel items
ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack.....

1. Match theitems with the pictures then practise saying the following items .
*/ New words.
- plaster | ?pl??st? |
- painkillers | ?pe?nk?l? |
- sun cream | s?n kri?m |
- scissors | ?s?z?z |
- sleeping bag | ?sli?p?? b? |
- backpack | ?bkpk |

1. Match theitems with the pictures then practise saying the following items .
1- painkillers
2- scissors
3- plaster
4- sun cream
5- sleeping bag
6- walking boots
7- backpack
8- compass

2.Complete the following sentenses
1- compass
2- sun cream
3- painkills
4- backpack
5- plaster
3. Now put the items in order . Number 1 is most useful on holiday . Number 8 is the least useful.

they are going on a beach holiday
they need.......

4.Listen and number the words you hear.
best, boat, coast, lost, boot , desert.plaster. forest

5. Listen again and repeat the words.

6. Listen and repeat .Pay attention to the bold-typed parts of the words.
- Listen and repeat


Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................








Ngy so?n : 9/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 16/ 11/ 2016
Period 35: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 3: A closer look 2


I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative adjectives, notice the pronunciation of comparative and superlative adjectives.
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: can, can't, must, mustn't, should, should.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :

2. Presentation.
- T can give some famous places and asks some questions about Mount everest, Tra Co beach, Amazon river?
3. Practice.
- Choose a more able St to act as Vy, and read the sentences to the class.
- Ss tick True(T) or False(F) in the box provided.
- T asks Ss to stand up if they think the sentence is True , or remain seated if they think the sentence is False.

- Play the recording and allow Ss to check their answers.

- Ask Ss to lookback at Vy's sentences, find and underline all the examples of -est.














- T asks all the students in the class do on their bokks, except only one who go to the board and do.
- Then T corrects if they do wrongly.


- T give the pieces of paper, and asks Ss to work in groups and make sentences about the place.


- T writes the example on the board , then guides the way to do.
- T can go arround the class and help the week students how to do.
4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.

*/ Brainstorming.

List the famous places which the Ss know.
- Ha Long bay, Da Lat city, Sapa,?



1.Vy is going to a quiz about wonders of the world.Read the sentences and guess if they are true or false.




2.Listen to Vy giving the answer to the qiuz . check your guesses.
Keys: 1.T 2.T 3.F
4.T 5.T 6.T
3. Underline all the words ending in - est in the quiz.
1. Mount everest is the highest mountain in the world.

2. Ba Be lake is the largest lake inVietNam.
?
4.Complete the table with the comparative and superlative adjectives

good
bad
tall
long
wide
large
hot
better
worse
taller
?
Best
The best
?
?

5. Now Vy is talking about other amazing places. Complete the passage..
1- hottest 2- hotter 3- coldest
4- coldest 5- colder 6- bigger
7- highest 8- smaller
6. Cut up some pieces of paper. Write the names of some famous places on them.
- eg:



"West Lake is the largest lake in HN"


7. Vy givingMai some feedback . read and underline the forms of must.


8 .Look at the classroom rules below. Write....




Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Ngy so?n : 11/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 18/ 11/ 2016
Period 36: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn't.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in the book at page 53 to ask some questions and the Ss answer.

2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the board and asks Ss to read all the newwords to check the pronunciation .

3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry.

- One student stands up and read the title of activity 1. An other translates it into Vietnamese what they are going to do.

- Ask Ss to use information in the text and their own ideas to fill in the " must " and " mustn't " columns.




- Create your own list and demonstrate the activity with a more able Ss
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end


Modal verbs
Must + V
You must be careful in the garden

- T asks them to work in open pairs to practice roling a play.

4. Production.
- Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.



- Where are they? What are they doing?
- Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
*/ Newwords.
- tent | tent |
- waterproof coat | ?w??t?pru?f k??t |
- sun hat | s?n ht |
- diverse | da??v??s |

2.Now make a list of the things must take to the Himalayas. then add things you mustn't take.

Must
mustn't
compass
sun cream
painkills
backpack
plaster

shorts
t- shirt


3. Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.Try to give reasons

What to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Compass
- sun cream
- Painkills
- Backpack
- plaster
Example:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK I think you must take a waterproof coat. It is the highest mountain in the world. It's cold and rainy there!
A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ?
4. Perform your Role-play for the class



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................












Ngy so?n : 16/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 23/ 11/ 2016
Period 37: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know and understand the famous places such as : Ha Long Bay and Hue City. .
- Review the comparatives and supperatives.
- Newwords: essential, traditional, central, attraction, cuisine.
- Skill: Reading.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures at page 54 and make predictions about the text.






2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the blackboard.



3. Practice.
- Ss read the newwords in chorus. Notice the pronunciation.
- T corrects if they pronounce wrongly.

- Ask ss to find the four words in the passages and underline them.
- Check their meaning.
- Ask ss to read the sentences then write true or false .



- Answer the following questions.
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play.
Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end.




- Discuss with Ss which things they find interesting /uninteresting about HL Bay and Hue


- Ask Ss to close their book
divide ss into A and B.
- Tell group A to describe HL Bay.
- Tell group B to describe Hue.
4. Production.
- Tell the class they are ivsiting in your hometown
- Ask Ss to suggest some advice
- Use must /mustn't
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.

1. Where is the passage from?
2. What is it about ?
3. What do you know about the subject?
1.Before you Read .Look at the picture below and make prediction about the text. Then read and check your ideas.
1- HaLong bay and Hue
2- places
3- I ...
*/ Newwords
- essential | ??sen?l |
- traditional | tr??d??n?l |
- central | ?sentr?l |
- attraction | ??trk?n |
- cuisine | kw??zi?n |
2. Find these words in the passages in 1 . then check the meaning.

Essential , activities , attaction , cuisine

3. Read the following sentenses.then tickT or F
1. In HL Bay some of the island look like people or animals.
1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F 5 T
4. Now answer the following questions
1- HL Bay in Quang Ninh
2. You must take a boat ride.
3.A visit to the imperial City is more important.
4.Bacause people travel there just for the food.
SPEAKING
5. Work in pairs. Make notes about ona of the places in the brochure. use the information in the text and your own ideas.
- Tuan Chau is the biggest island in HL Bay
- VNese seafood
- Traditional dance
6. Tell your partner about the place.


7. Your friends are visiting your town. Think about what they must and mustn't do while they are there. role- play the conversation in group.
a- Things they must do/bring:
b: Things they mustn't do/bring:

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

===============================
Ngy so?n : 18/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 25/ 11/ 2016
Period 38: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick's family are talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.
- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1


2. Presentation.



3. Practice.

- Ask Ss which one they think Nick's family will choose as their holiday destination
- Play the recording for the answer.

- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.









3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Ask some questions to prepare the class for the activity







4. Production.

- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen places
-Check their ideas at the end






5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

-Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1

HL Bay and Hue

1Nick'family are in the travel agent's .They want to go on holiday.They are choosing a place from the brochure above .which place do they choose?

- Listen

- They go to HL BAy


2. Listen again and answer the following questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha Trang
2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is more interesting.
4- Yes, he is

WRITING
3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Do you have picture or can you draw a map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


4. In notes , fill each blank in the network with the inforation about the place.Then use these notes to write a short paragraph about it.


1 - where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================








Ngy so?n : 19/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 26/ 11/ 2016
Period 39: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.
- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four


- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity













-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.

- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.


B. Grammar
- Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
- Activity 4 KEY
adj
comparative form
fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting
- Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.
KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare some things in your school.
-Make a description.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Ngy so?n : 19/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 26/ 11/ 2016

Period 39: Revision

I . Objectives:
- Ss revise what they have learnt in unit 4 and unit 5
II. Contents:
- Sounds / i: / and / I / ; / t / and / st /
- Comparative and superative adjectives.
- Modal verb: must
III. Procedures:


Teacher & Students
Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final- / i: / and / I / ; / t / and / st /

III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the present continuous.
Ex 6:
- Asks Ss to do ex6.
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board, others do it on their notebook.
- Checks Ss' answers
Ex 7:
- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention to the hints, do exercise individuallyand compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss' answers and gives the correct answers.
Ex 8:
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

Ex9:
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the conversation
IV. Skills:
1. Reading:
- Ss do ex1,2 individually.
- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews the other two about what they like and dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members' answers in the table and report them to the class, then summerises Ss'ideas.
3. Listening :
Ex 4 :
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5:
- Ss read the questions quickly.
- T plays the recording again and answer the questions
- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail on the board
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework :
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the test 2.



* Key :
1D 2C 3C 4A 5B





/ b / : book, bag, bed ......
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...



1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo


- Play: sports, badminton
- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.




Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter
Down : 2. dining room 4. hall



1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
4. patient 5. sporty.







1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping 5.is




1. is 2. isn't 3. doesn't have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is

6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4

Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B

Ex 2 : 1. it's in a quiet place not far from....
2. They're hard-working and serious.
.............




- Write homework on their notebook.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngy so?n : 26 / 11 / 2016
Ngy ktra: 2 / 12 / 2016

Period 41 : Test 2

I. M?c ?ch yu c?u:
1. ??c hi?u :
??c ?o?n v?n l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng sai, tr? l?i cu h?i d?a vo n?i dung bi h?c.
2. Vi?t:
Bi?t s? d?ng c?u trc v ng? php s?p x?p cc t? ? cho thnh cu hon ch?nh.
3. Nghe :
Nghe ?o?n v?n ch?n ?p n ?ng / sai theo n?i dung bi nghe.
4. Ki?n th?c ngn ng? :
Bi?t phn bi?t cch pht m c?a t?, s? d?ng ki?n th?c ng? php ? h?c ?? chia ??ng t? v l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng.
II. Chu?n b? :
Bi photo.
III. Ma tr?n :




C?p ??
t? duy



T?ng
Ch? ??

Nh?n
bi?t
Thng
hi?u
V?n
d?ng



TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL

Language
Pho


4
1.0



4
1.0
focus
Vocab
6
3.0





6
3.0

Gram



4
1.0


4
2.0
Reading




6
1.5


4
1.0
Writing






4
2.0
4
2.0
Listening

4
1.0





4
1.0
T?ng

10
4.0

12
4.0


4
2.0
26
10.




IV. ?? bi :
A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M:
Question 1: Circle the odd one out(1p)
1. A. park B. temple C. memorial D. doctor
2. A. teaching B. morning C. working D. reading
3. A. weather B. interesting C. beautiful D. expensive
4. A. on B. of C. at D. the
Question 2: Choose the best answer.( 3ps )
1. There is a park in front ???. the hotel.
A. of B. on C. to D. at
2. Hoi An is so ???. .
A. boring B. historic C. terrible D. modern
3. The town has many motorbikes. It's very ??. .
A. quiet B. happy C. exciting D. noisy
4. Excuse me ! ???. there a post office near here ?
A. Is B. Are C. Do D. Does
5. My head hurts. I need to take some ??. .
A. backpacks B. compasses C. painkillers D. plasters
6. Ayres Rock is in ??.. .
A. Viet Nam B. Australia C. Brazil D. Great Britain
B- PH?N T? LU?N :
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs: ( 1p)
1. You must ( get )????????.???? up early .
2. Look ! Our teacher (come)???????????????..
3. I (go) ????????????..?.. out to have dinner this evening.
4. ?????.??. he usually (play)???????????..? soccer every afternoon ?
Question 2: Fill the blanks with the appropriate forms of the adjectives in brackets:
a. Travelling by taxi is ????????.???..?????.than by bus. (expensive)
b. The Sahara is the world's ???????.???..??????desert. (hot)
c. This building is ????????????..???? than that one (tall)
d. She's not very happy. Her exam results are ?????..???????..than her sister. (good)
e. This is the ??????.???????.??. film I have ever seen (bad)
f. Loan is the ?????????..????????. student in our class. (intelligent)
Question 3: Read the e-mail and answer the following questions.( 1,5ps)
Dear Phong,

I'm sorry I couldn't write to you earlier because I was very busy. Now, we're staying in a small hotel near a shopping area in District 10. Near my hotel, there's a cinema, a bank, a supermarket and some cafs. There are some big shops at the end of the street. It is also very noisy here because there's always a lot of traffic, day and night.

In my hometown, I live in a quieter street. There are some small shops, a school and a market in my neighbourhood but there isn't a park and a cinema. The streets are narrower but they are cleaner and there isn't so much traffic. The air is much fresher, too. And every house has a backyard and a front yard.

Love,
Minh

1. Where is Minh staying now?
??????????????.????????????????????
2. Why is it very noisy around his hotel?
??????????????.??????????????????
3. What are there in his neighbourhood?
??????????????????????..????????????
4. Is there a cinema in his neighbourhood?
???????????????????????????????????
5. What are the streets in his neighbourhood like?
?????????????????????????????????
6. Is the air polluted ?
?????????????????????????????????

Question 4: Reorder the words to make the meaningful sentences.( 1p )
1. modern / This / is / that / more / hotel / than / one.
=> ?????????????????????????..???????
2. on / Take / turning / the / left / the / second.
=> ????????????????????????..???????????
3. a / square / there / near / house / Is / your ?
=> ???????????????????????..????????????
4. do / at / must / You/ homework / home / your.
=> ?????????????????????????..??????

Question 5: Listen to the following conversation and fill the missing words (1p)
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It's on your (1)?????????..?..
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It's in Le Duan Street. Take the second (2)?????????..?.. and it's on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?
B: "Quynh" Caf in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First (3)?????????..?.. left, then turn right. Go Straight. It's on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then (4)????????? to the end of Le Loi Street, and it's
on your right.
Tape script:
A: Excuse me. Where is the supermarket ?
B: Go to the end of this street. It's on your left.
A: And where is the lower secondary school ?
B: It's in Le Duan Street. Take the second right and it's on your left.
A. Great! Where can I have some coffee ?
B: "Quynh" Caf in Tran Quang Dieu Street is a good one.
A: How can I get there ?
B: First turn left, then turn right. Go Straight. It's on your left.
A: How about art gallery ?
B: First take the third left. Then go to the end of Le Loi Street, and it's on your right.


V. ?p n v thang ?i?m ch?m:

A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M :
Question 1: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. speaks 2. are? doing - am reading 3 aren't going
Question 2: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn't
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................


Ngy so?n : 27/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 3/ 12/ 2016

Period 42: Unit 6:

Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.
II. Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students
Board & contents
Warm up.
-Have Ss work in 2 groups.
- Teacher sticks the pictures of holidays on the board and asks Ss to match the pictures to the words phrases
-Give feed back.

A. WARM UP.
Matching
1. Easter Day
2. Christmas Day
3. Thanhsgiving Day
4. New Year's Day


Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about the picture

- What is Phong doing ? - What is the interview about? Holiday.

- give some new words.




* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
Ss look at the conversation, listen to the tape and then work in pairs to practice the conversation.
- T asks some pairs to read the conversation again.
- T asks Ss to read the conversation again and answer the questions:

Ss work independently and decide if the statements are true or false, then share their answers with their partners.
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work independently and decide if the statements are true or false, then share their answers with their partners.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs.
- Ss refers to the conversation to find the information and fill in the blanks



- Ss match the words to the picture.( individually)




-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus



- Ss look at the pictures again and find out the pictures relating to Tet holiday.

-T asks Ss to play the game

B. NEW LESSON
I. Getting Started.



-He's having an interview.

It's about Vietnamese Tet









1. Activity 1:
a. Pre - teach vocabulary:
- (to) celebrate:
- (to) decorate:
- fireworks:
- family gathering (n):
- peach blossom
- apricot blossom
- lucky money
b. Listen and Read:
-
a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different times each year?
b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
c. Does Tim travel during Tet?
2. Activity 2: T/F statements

Statements
True
False
1Phong is the first person on the show
2This year, Tet is in February.
3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.
4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
5.Next, the interview will talk to a person
from Japan.





- Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T
3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings
.Feedback 2:
1. The end of January
2. house
3. flowers and pla 4. fireworks
5. great food ; lucky money
6. family gatherings
4. Activity 4: Matching
Lucky money e. swimming pool
a. peach blossom
b. and apricot blosom
c. house decorations
d. Banh chung and banh tet
g. books
e. family gathering
h. School ground
- Feedback 3: 1.b; 2.a; 3.c; 4.e; 5.h; 6.g; 7.f; 8.d
5. Activity 5:
- Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
II. Consolidation :
- T asks Ss to write down three things or activities they like best about Tet, using I like/love/ enjoy...'

Homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
C. HOME WORK
- Learn by heart new vocabularies.
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................


Ngy so?n : 30/ 11/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 7/ 12/ 2016

Period 43: Unit 6:
Lesson 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to 'Tet': things, activities.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /?/ in isolation
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

- Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back
I. WARM UP :


* Give some new words



Vocabulary checking : R.O.R




- T plays the recording and asks Ss to listen carefully and repeat the words in chorus and ind.






T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 to label the pictures with the words in 1
T asks Ss to work independently suitable nouns, then check with their partners. T asks Ss to work independently to match the verbs with the suitable nouns, then check with their partners.






- T asks Ss to write the phrases they have formed in 3







T plays the recording. Ss listens carefully first and repeat. T plays the recording as many times as necessary. Then asks them to write the words in the two appropriate boxes. Check if they do this correctly.
T asks Ss to look at the sentences first and underline any words they think contain the sounds /?/ and /s/. After that T plays the recording and Ss listen and decide which sentence has /s/ and which has /?/.
- Ss compare their answers in pairs before T checks their answers with the whole class T asks Ss to look at the sentences first and underline any words they think contain the sounds /?/ and /s/. After that T plays the recording and Ss listen and decide which sentence has /s/ and which has /?/.
- T asks Ss to listen to the poem and practice reading it.
-T asks them to pay more attention to the key words with /s/ and /?/ sounds. Then asks some volunteers to stand up and read the poem aloud.


II. NEW LESSON:
A. Vocabulary
* Pre teach Vocabulary:
- calendar
- (to) hang
- rubbbish
- should
- (to) wish
1.Activity 1










2. Activity 2 (pairwork)
- Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h, 8.e, 9.k, 10.c, 11.a
3. Activity 3
-
Verbs
Nouns













Feedback: 4. Activity 4:
- cook special food 7. plant trees
- go to a pagoda 8. make a wish
- give lucky money 9. hang a calendar
- visit relatives 10. watch fireworks
- clean the furniture 11.do the shopping
- decorate our house 12.buy peach blossom










B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /?/
1. Activity 5
-
/?/
/s/
She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish

Blossoms, summer, rice, celebrate, school, speacial, spring

2 Activity 6
-

Statements
/?/
/s/
1. We come home every summer


2. We should leave early.


3. I will make a wish


4. I'm second in class.


5. My mother goes shopping every day.


6. This is a small garden.


7. Spring is coming.


- Feedback: /?/: 2,3,5 /s/ : 1,4,6,7
3. Activity 7:
Spring is coming!
Tet is coming!
She sells peach blossoms.
Her cheeks shine.
Her eyes smile.
Her smile is shy.
She sells peach blossoms.


Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................




Ngy so?n : 2/ 12/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 9/ 12/ 2016
Period 44: Unit 6 :
Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of
intentions with 'will' and advice with 'should'.
II. Preparations:
Posters, picturest':
III.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
IV. Teaching steps.



Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 3/ 12/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 10/ 12/ 2016

Period 45: Unit 6 :
Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION

I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:
- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use " must and mustn't " to give order.
II.Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer
III. teaching steps.
Teacher & Students
Board & contents
Warm up
-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups.
- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes and try to remember as much as they can.
- T asks the class to cover the page and tell T what they remember.
- T elicits answers by asking:

-Ss write the answer on the board.

I. WARM- UP:
Make sentences:


a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is the nicest in the world.
b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world .The Library of Congress is the biggest in the world.


- Give new words.



-checking: R-O- R




- T asks Ss to open their books and read quickly to check their predictions.
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss read quickly for information.







- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work individually ).











- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the ideas they brainstormed to fill in their own schedule.
- T can ask Ss to sit back and back.
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other.
- Ss can report to the class about their partner's schedule.
- T asks the class to cover the page and tell T what they remember.
T: Give homework
Ss: Copy
Ss' work ( pairs)
II. NEW LESSON
1. Vocabulary
Tent : l?u, r?p
waterproof coat : o m?a, v?i khng th?m n??c
torch: ng?n ?u?c, ?n pin
map: b?n ??
sun hat: m?, nn che n?ng
mobile phone: ?i?n tho?i di ??ng
diverse (a):g?m nhi?u lo?i khc nhau
ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.
- T asks Ss to read the sentences.
- T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the text and answer T or F.
- Ss work individually, then compare the answers with their partners.
Modal Verbs: Show obligatory
Must/ Mustn't + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.
You mustn't wear shorts or T-shirt when you climb the Everest.
act2. Now make a list of things you must take to the Himalayas. Then add things you mustn't take.
MUST
MUSTN'T
Compass
Go alone
Torch
Shorts
Tent
T-shirts
Coat

Waterproof

flashlight

Sun hat

Mobile phone

map

Ask for advice


Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give reasons.
Ex:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK. I think you must take the ............because it is ....................
A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ..........
Act4.Perform your role-play for the class.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. Home work
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 3/ 12/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 10/ 12/ 2016

Period 46: Test correction

I. Nhn xt chung v bi lm ca HS:
- a s hc sinh c thc t lm bi, tuy nhin kt qu cha tht tt
- Nhiu Hs vit xu, trnh by bn.
- Nhiu em lm bi chia ng t v vit li cu cha tt.
II.?p n v thang im chm

A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M :
Question 1: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1C 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1B 2C 3A 4B 5A 6C

B- PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. speaks 2. are? doing - am reading 3 aren't going
Question 2: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
A.
1F 2F 3T 4T
B.
1. She lives in the country
2. There are 6.
3. No, it isn't
4. Yes, she does.
Question 3: ( 0,5?/ cu ?ng)
1. There is a sofa in front of you
2. Can you open the door please ?
3. Are there books on the bookshelf ?
4. Would you like to go out with me ?
Question 4: ( 0,25?/ cu ?ng)
1T 2F 3F 4T
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................


Ngy so?n : 3/ 12/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 10/ 12/ 2016
Period 47: Unit 6: Our Tet holiday
Lesson : Skills 1
A. Objectives :
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get to know New Year practices in other countries.
B. Preparations :
Posters, pictures.
C. Procedure :
I. Warm up : Matching game
- T asks Ss to match the flags with the countries, then match the countries with the nationalities. (Activity 1)


















T reads the words of countries and nationalities aloud and asks Ss to repeat in chorus and ind.
-T models the way to do this with a student (Activitiy 2)
Ex: A: I'm from England.
B: You're English.
- T asks Ss to hold a flag, move around the class, meet their friends and introduce where they come from. Then their friends will tell them their nationalities.
II. New lesson :
1.Pre- Reading: Activity 3
- T gives out the pictures of people in different countries celebrating New Year differently and asks Ss to match them with the different groups of people
Feedback:
1. The Scottish, Scotland 3. The H'Mong, Viet Nam
2. The Thai, Thailand 4. The Japanese, Japan
2. While-reading:
* Activity 4:
- T asks Ss to read the four paragraphs. T helps Ss by drawing their attention to some details from the reading and referring to the picture provided in 3. T asks to Ss to underline the verbs and the objects to remember the information from the reading.
Feedback: a. H'mong b. Thai c. Japanese d. Scottish
* Activity 5:
- T asks Ss to find and check the meaning of some new words as they are used in the text by matching them with the definitions.
Feedback: a. feathers: the covers of a rooster, chicken or bird.
b. cool down: become colder
c. remove: take away
d. first footer: the first person to enter your home after New Year's Eve.
3. Post Reading:
- T asks Ss to work in groups to write the two fact they like best down on a piece of paper. then they take turns to read aloud. The group decides which group of people he/she is talking about.
D. Homework
- Describe your house
- Do exercises 1 ( P.12) ,2 (P.13)
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????......................

Ngy so?n : 3/ 12/ 2016
Ngy d?y: 13/ 12/ 2016

Period 46:

PERIOD Unit : OUR TET HOLIDAY
Lesson 1: Getting Started
Happy newyear
I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the interview between the interviewer and Phong about the Vietnamese Tet holiday.

* Teaching aids: - Cards, posters, cassette & tape.
II. Teaching steps.
Teacher and Students
Board & contents
Warm up.
-Have Ss work in 2 groups.
- Teacher sticks the pictures of holidays on the board and asks Ss to match the pictures to the words phrases
-Give feed back.

B. WARM UP.
Matching
1. Easter Day
2. Christmas Day
3. Thanhsgiving Day
4. New Year's Day


Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about the picture


- What is Phong doing ? - What is the interview about? Holiday.

- give some new words.




* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
Ss look at the conversation, listen to the tape and then work in pairs to practice the conversation.
- T asks some pairs to read the conversation again.
- T asks Ss to read the conversation again and answer the questions:

Ss work independently and decide if the statements are true or false, then share their answers with their partners.
- Ss give out their answers.Ss work independently and decide if the statements are true or false, then share their answers with their partners.
- T asks Ss to work in pairs.
- Ss refers to the conversation to find the information and fill in the blanks



- Ss match the words to the picture.( individually)




-T reads aloud and Ss repeat in chorus



- Ss look at the pictures again and find out the pictures relating to Tet holiday.

-T asks Ss to play the game
B. NEW LESSON
I. Getting Started.



-He's having an interview.

It's about Vietnamese Tet










1. Activity 1:
a. Pre - teach vocabulary:
- (to) celebrate:
- (to) decorate:
- fireworks:
- family gathering (n):
- peach blossom
- apricot blossom
- lucky money
b. Listen and Read:
-
a. Do the Vietnamese celebrate Tet at different times each year?
b. What should people do to celebrate Tet?
c. Does Tim travel during Tet?
2. Activity 2: T/F statements
-

Statements
True
False
1Phong is the first person on the show
2This year, Tet is in February.
3.Tet is a quiet time of the year.
4.Phong loves eating lots of good food during Tet.
5.Next, the interview will talk to a person from Japan.





- Feedback1: 1.F, 2.F, 3.F, 4.T, 5.T
3. Activity 3: Gap Fillings
.Feedback 2: 1. The end of January
2. house
3. flowers and plants
4. fireworks
5. great food ; lucky money
6. family gatherings
4. Activity 4: Matching
f. Lucky money e. swimming pool
g. peach blossom
h. and apricot blosom
i. f. house decorations
j. Banh chung and banh tet g. books
k. family gathering h. School ground


- Feedback 3: 1.b; 2.a; 3.c; 4.e; 5.h; 6.g; 7.f; 8.d
5. Activity 5:
- Feedback 4: 1, 2, 3, 7, 8
II. Consolidation :
- .
- T asks Ss to write down three things or activities they like best about Tet, using I like/love/ enjoy...'
.
Homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
C. HOME WORK
- Learn by heart new vocabularies.
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
-Write about your Tet holiday.
- Do A.phonetics/40 (wb)
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

PERIOD Unit 6: our tet holiday.

Lesson 3: a closer look 2

I. Teaching points:

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to identify and practice the language of intentions with 'will' and advice with 'should'.
B. Preparations: Posters, picturest': *Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.











































PERIOD

Unit 5: our tet holiday
Lesson 2 A closer look 1

I. Teaching points:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to know and use vocabulary related to 'Tet': things, activities.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /s/ /?/ in isolation
*Teaching aids: cassette, poster.



II. Teaching steps:
Teacher & Students
Board & contents

Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Give feed back
I. WARM UP :


* Give some new words



Vocabulary checking : R.O.R




- T plays the recording and asks Ss to listen carefully and repeat the words in chorus and ind.






T asks Ss to work in groups of 4 to label the pictures with the words in 1
T asks Ss to work independently suitable nouns, then check with their partners. T asks Ss to work independently to match the verbs with the suitable nouns, then check with their partners.






- T asks Ss to write the phrases they have formed in 3







T plays the recording. Ss listens carefully first and repeat. T plays the recording as many times as necessary. Then asks them to write the words in the two appropriate boxes. Check if they do this correctly.
T asks Ss to look at the sentences first and underline any words they think contain the sounds /?/ and /s/. After that T plays the recording and Ss listen and decide which sentence has /s/ and which has /?/.
- Ss compare their answers in pairs before T checks their answers with the whole class T asks Ss to look at the sentences first and underline any words they think contain the sounds /?/ and /s/. After that T plays the recording and Ss listen and decide which sentence has /s/ and which has /?/.
- T asks Ss to listen to the poem and practice reading it.
-T asks them to pay more attention to the key words with /s/ and /?/ sounds. Then asks some volunteers to stand up and read the poem aloud.


II. NEW LESSON:
A. Vocabulary
* Pre teach Vocabulary:
- calendar
- (to) hang
- rubbbish
- should
- (to) wish
1.Activity 1










2. Activity 2 (pairwork)
- Feedback: 1.b, 2.i, 3.d, 4.j, 5.f, 6.g, 7.h, 8.e, 9.k, 10.c, 11.a
3. Activity 3
-
Verbs
Nouns












- Feedback: 4. Activity 4:
- cook special food 7. plant trees
- go to a pagoda 8. make a wish
- give lucky money 9. hang a calendar
- visit relatives 10. watch fireworks
- clean the furniture 11.do the shopping
- decorate our house 12.buy peach blossom










B. PRONUNCIATION : /s/ & /?/
1. Activity 5
-
/?/
/s/
She, shopping, should, wish, rubbish

Blossoms, summer, rice, celebrate, school, speacial, spring

2 Activity 6
-

Statements
/?/
/s/
8. We come home every summer


9. We should leave early.


10. I will make a wish


11. I'm second in class.


12. My mother goes shopping every day.


13. This is a small garden.


14. Spring is coming.


- Feedback: /?/: 2,3,5 /s/ : 1,4,6,7
3. Activity 7:
Spring is coming!
Tet is coming!
She sells peach blossoms.
Her cheeks shine.
Her eyes smile.
Her smile is shy.
She sells peach blossoms.



Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: closer look2



PERIOD 36 Unit 5: natural wonders of the world
Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
P:
T:
I.Teaching points: After the lesson Ss can:
- Review comparative and superlative adjectives to describe things in nature.
- Use " must and mustn't " to give order.
*Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters,TV and computer
II. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
Warm up
-Ask Ss to play in 2 groups.
- T asks Ss to look at it for 2 minutes and try to remember as much as they can.
- T asks the class to cover the page and tell T what they remember.
- T elicits answers by asking:

-Ss write the answer on the board.

I. WARM- UP:
Make sentences:


a. Crater Lake/ nice/ world > Crater lake is the nicest in the world.
b. The Library of Congress/ big/ world > The Library of Congress is the biggest in the world.



- Give new words.



-checking: R-O- R




- T asks Ss to open their books and read quickly to check their predictions.
- T sets 2 minutes limit to ensure Ss read quickly for information.







- T asks Ss to complete the table ( Work individually ).













- T pairs Ss ands asks them to use the ideas they brainstormed to fill in their own schedule.
- T can ask Ss to sit back and back.
- Ss have 3 minutes to speak each other.
- Ss can report to the class about their partner's schedule.
- T asks the class to cover the page and tell T what they remember.
T: Give homework
Ss: Copy
-
Ss' work ( pairs)

II. NEW LESSON
1. Vocabulary
Tent : l?u, r?p
waterproof coat : o m?a, v?i khng th?m n??c
torch: ng?n ?u?c, ?n pin
map: b?n ??
sun hat: m?, nn che n?ng
mobile phone: ?i?n tho?i di ??ng
diverse (a):/ dai'ves/ g?m nhi?u lo?i khc nhau
ACt1. Read the travel guide entry.
- T asks Ss to read the sentences.
- T sets 5 minutes limit for Ss to reread the text and answer T or F.
- Ss work individually, then compare the answers with their partners.
Modal Verbs: Show obligatory
Must/ Mustn't + Vinf
Ex: You must bring a compass.
You mustn't wear shorts or T-shirt when you climb the Everest.
act2. Now make a list of things you must take to the Himalayas. Then add things you mustn't take.
MUST
MUSTN'T
Compass
Go alone
Torch
Shorts
Tent
T-shirts
Coat

Waterproof

flashlight

Sun hat

Mobile phone

map

Ask for advice


Act3. Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist. Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas. Try to give reasons.
Ex:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK. I think you must take the ............because it is ....................
A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ..........


Act4.Perform your role-play for the class.

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. Home work
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1.











Period 33: Unit 5: Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 1:



Ngy so?n : 6/ 12/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 13/ 12/ 2013
Period 48: Unit 6 : Our Tet holiday
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what Mai and her mother will buy for Tet and what they will buy for the people in their family.
- Write an e-mail to talk about what they should/ shouldn't, will/ won't buy for Tet.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Ask Ss to recall the things in the box



2. Presentation.



3. Practice.

- Ask Ss which they will buy .
- Play the recording for the answer.











3. Write an e-mail about Tet use will/ won't, should/ shouldn't.
- Ask some questions to prepare the class for the activity







4. Production.

- Aska Ss some questions about their plans for Tet


5. Home work.
- Revision will/ won't, should/ shouldn't.
- Complete all the exercises in workbook
- Prepare the new lesson.



- Ask Ss to recall the things in the box :
+ peach blossom.
+ banh chung.
+ clothes
1Mai and her mother are going shopping for Tet. Listen and tick the things they will buy.
- Listen

- They will buy a peach blossom,.....


2. Listen again and write the names of things they will buy for the people in column A.
1- some new clothes.
2- a new tie
3- some sweets

WRITING
3. Write an e-mail to a friend about your Tet holiday. Include what you will and won't do. Also include things people should and shouldn't do. Use your notes from Speaking and the rest of the unit to help you.
- What is it ?
- What does this letter talk about?

4. In notes , fill each blank in the network with the inforation about the place.Then use these notes to write a short paragraph about it.


1- How do you feel about Tet?
2- This year, what should/ shouldn't you do?
3- This year, what will/ won't you do?



Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................













Ngy so?n : 9/ 12/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 16/ 12/ 2013
Period 49: Unit 6 : Our Tet holiday
Lesson 7: Looking back


I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocab related to Tet and the grammar points: should/ shouldn't, will/ won't.
- They also communicate by rearranging the words to make New Year wishes and greetings.
II. Teaching aids:
poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four


- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity








II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Draw lines to match the actions on the left with the things on the right
KEY
1. j 2.b 3. e.........
2. Activity 2
KEY
1About Tet:.......
2. Not about Tet

B. Grammar
Activity 3 KEY:
Ss make sentences with will and won't
Activity 4 KEY
Ss make sentences with should/ shouldn't
C. Communication
- Activity 5 KEY
1 I wish you a happy new year
2 Have a great year with your studies
3 ...............
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



-use the words and phrases for Tet
-Ask and talk about Tet in Viet Nam
-will/ won't for intentions
-should/ should for advice
-ask and talk about Tet in Viet Nam.




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
Write down in a big letters the three dreams you have for this year.
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Make a wish.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

















Ngy so?n : 10 / 12 / 2013
Ngy d?y: 17-21 / 12/ 2013
Period 50+51: Review 2
I. Objectives
- Revise the language Ss have studied and the skills they have practised since unit 4.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, cassette.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

I. Pronunciation:
- Elicits the rules of pronouncing the final- s/es.
Ex 1:
- Ss do Ex 1 individually then share their answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board to write the answer.
- T corrects and give the correct answers.
Ex 2:
- T holds a game. Asks Ss to find the name of school things and furniture in the house which begin with / b /and / p / ( in pairs ). The pair that finds the most words will go to the board and write their answers .
- Asks other to add any more words.

II. Vocabulary:
EX 3 :
- Ss do ex 3 individually
- Asks Ss to share their answers with a partner.
- Asks Ss to come to the board and write down the answers.
- Checks Ss'answers and give the correct answers.



EX 4: Crossword puzzle
- Ss work in pairs to do the crossword.

Ex 5: Choose the correct words.
- Asks Ss to do ex5 individually.
- Ss give the correct answers.
- T corrects and give correct answers

III. Grammar :
- Elicits the use of the present simple and the present continuous.

Ex 6:
- Asks Ss to do ex6.
- Calls one Ss to do the ex on the board, others do it on their notebook.
- Checks Ss' answers

Ex 7:
- Ss read the text carefully and pay attention to the hints, do exercise individuallyand compare their answers with a partner.
- Checks Ss' answers and gives the correct answers.

Ex 8:
- Ss work in pairs to do ex8
- One pair goes to the board and does this ex.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

Ex9:
- Asks Ss do this ex in pairs.
- Asks Ss to give the correct answers.
- Give feedback and correct answers.
- Calls one or two pairs act out the conversation

IV. Skills:
1. Reading:
- Ss do ex1,2 individually.
- Ss compare the answers with their partner.
- Gives feedback and correct answers.

2. Speaking:
- Ss work in groups of three. One interviews the other two about what they like and dislike about school and the reason why.
- Ss write their group members' answers in the table and report them to the class, then summerises Ss'ideas.

3. Listening :
Ex 4 :
- Plays the recording once for Ss to listen
- Play the recording again for Ss to check their answers.
- Asks Ss to give their answers
- Gives feedback and correct answers.
Ex 5:
- Ss read the questions quickly.
- T plays the recording again and answer the questions
- Ss compare their answers with a partner.
- Give feedback and correct answers.

4. Writing:
- Elicits the parts of an e-mail.
- Asks Ssto write their e-mail individually.
- Calls 2 Ss to write the email on the board
- Other Ss and teacher comment on the e-mail on the board
- collects some e-mails to correct at home.
* Homework :
- Redo the exercises at home.
- Prepare for the first term test.



* Key :
1D 2C 3C 4A 5B










/ b / : book, bag, bed ......
/ p / pen, pencil, picture, ...





1. English 2. homework 3 lunch 4. sports
5. badminton 6. physics 7. lesson 8. Judo
- Play: sports, badminton
- Have: lunch, a lesson
- Do: homework, judo
- Study: English, physics.

Across: 1. wardrobe 3. livingroom
5. apartment 6. porter
Down : 2. dining room 4. hall


1. quiet 2. shy 3. hard-working
4. patient 5. sporty.






1. is raining 2. do you have 3. am not going out; am doing 4. likes; is sleeping 5.is




1. is 2. isn't 3. doesn't have 4. is
5. has 6. are 7.is 8. is










6-1-7-2-3-5-8-4





Ex1: 1A 2C 3C 4B 5A 6B
Ex 2 : 1. it's in a quiet place not far from....
2. They're hard-working and serious.
.............













kitchen - garden - living room - bedroom.





1. She's watering the plants in the garden.
2. He's listening to the radio
3. He's inMi's bedroom.
4. She's watching TV.








- Write homework on their notebook.

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................





Ngy so?n: 16/ 12/ 2013
Ngy d?y : 23-24- 30/ 12/ 2013

Period 52+53+54 Revision
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use what they learnt to do exercise.
II. Teaching aids:
textbook, extra-board.
III. Teaching steps:
- Revise :
+ The present simple tense and present continuous tense
+ Comparative and superative
- Asks Ss to do exercises
Question I. Give the correct form of the verbs in bracket.
1. What time you ( go ) to school everyday ? - I (go) at 6.30
2. Tuan (meet) you this evening ?
- He (not meet) me, his sister (meet) me.
3. He (can) draw very well.
4. Tu and his brother (go) swimming now?
- No, they (not go) swimming, they (play)
5. You mustn't (sit) on the table.
6. She ( have) breakfast at 6.30 every morning ?
- No. She (not have) at 6.30, she (have) at 6.00.
7. I won't (go) to Ha Noi next week, I will ( have) a party with my family.
8. Now it (be) 11 o'clock, you ( eat) lunch ?
- No, I (not eat) , I (cook)
9. There ( be ) four chairs in the kitchen ?
- No, there (not be) four, there (be) one.
10. They like ( read ) books in the library.
* Answer key :
1. do you go- go
2. Is Tuan meeting - isn't meeting - is meeting
3. draw
4. Are ? going - aren't go - are playing.
5. sit
6. Does she have - doesn't have - has
7. go - have
????????


Question II. Change the adjectives in backet into comparatives or superatives.
1. This house is (tall) than that one
2. My mother cooks (good) than me.
3. This is the (interesting) I've seen
4. Lam is the (short) student in my group
5. Today is the (happy) day in my life.
6. This is the (good) school in my village.
7. The roads in my town are ( noisy) than in your town.
8. This bag is (bad) than that one.
9. These books are ( expensive) than those ones.
10. She is the (bad) singer in her group.
* Answer key:
1. taller
2. better
3. most interesting
4. shortest
5. happiest
6. best
7. noisier
9. more expensive
10. worst
Question III. Reorder the words to make the meaningfull sentences
1. a / is/ the / there / living room / TV / in ?
2. house / next / the / my / is / to / hospital.
3. should / at / well / you / Tet / behave.
4. year / he / study / this / must / hard .
5. five / are / in / people / there / family / his.
6. statue /of / a / the / there / in / lakes / are / front / two / big.
7. we / by /shall /market / the / go / bus / to.
8. the / on / turning / take / the /third / right.
* Answer key:
1. Is there a Tv in the living room ?
2. My house is next to the hospital.
3. you should behave well at Tet
4. he must study hard this year.
5.there are five people in his family
????
Question IV: Complete the following sentences using the given words:
have , do , play , is , study , has , are
1. she ?? tall and thin. She ?? black hair and a round face.
2. They ?? judo very well.


3. I ??.. maths on Monday and Friday.
4. We ?? badminton every afternoon.
5. What ?? they doing ?
6. They ??.. English very well.
* Answer key:
1. is - has
2. do
3. have
4. play
5. are
6. study

* Adjustment:
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????















H?C K? II (N?m h?c :2014-2015)

Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 5/1/2015


Period 57 - UNIT 7: TELEVISION
Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives :
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+ Read the conversation again and answer the questions about the TV, use some adjectives to describe a TV programme Ss have watched.
+ Talk about a favorite TV programme.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: channel, check, schedule?..
2. Grammar: conjunctions: so
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities

Students' activities
Warmer (5'): Chatting
- Write the words "TELEVISION" on the board.
- Who can give ideas or vocabularies relating to this topic?
- You can give vietnamese words if you don't know the words in English.
I. Presentation (10')
1. Vocabulary
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.



* Checking vocab: Recall

2. * Set the scenes:
? Look at the picture on page 6
? Who are they?
? What are they doing?
- We are going to listen and read a dialogue between Phong and Hung.
II. Practice (20')
1/ Listen and read.
- Play the recording twice.
? Listen and read then check your answer for the last question.
a/ Read the conservation again and answer the questions.
? Run through the questions.
? Work individually.
? Share answers with your partner.
1/ What is Hung' favourite TV programme?
2/ What channel is Laughing out Loud on?
3/ Are Laughing out Loud and Mr Bean on at the same time?
4/ Why doesn't Phong like Mr Bean?
5/ What does Phong say about Tom?
- Teacher gets feedback
b/ Find the adjectives describing each character in the conversation and write them here.
Mr Bean: _______________
Tom: _______________
Jerry: _______________
c/ Which adj(s) below can you use to describe a TV programme you have watched? What programme is it?


Popular/ long/ educational/ boring/ funny/ good/ live/ entertaining.


2/ Put the correct word in the box under each picture.
? - Ask Ss to work individually.
? - Ask them to share answers with their partner.

- Teacher gets feedback
3/ Use suitable words to complete the sentences:
? - Ask Ss to work individually.
? - Ask them to share answers with their partner.
- Teacher gets feedback
1/ national
2/ comedy
3/ channels
4/ competition
5/ Cartoons
6/ educational
4./ Work in group.
Write down two things you like about television and two things you don't like about it. Talk to other in your group and see how many people share your ideas.
Likes: 1._________
2. _________
Dislike:1. __________
2. __________
III. Production ( 6')
? Tell your friends about your favorite TV programme.
? Why do you like it?
IV. Consolidation (2')
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 1



- Give ideas or vocabularies relating to
the topic



1. 1. Vocabulary:
Programme(n) ch??ng trnh truy?n hnh
Channel (n) knh truy?n hnh
Check (v) ki?m tra
Stupid (adj) ngu ng?c
Awful (adj) kinh kh?ng
Schedule(n) b?n ch??ng trnh
Vocab check: ROR
- Copy all the words

- Answer the questions individually.
- They are Phong and Hung.
- They are talking about their favorite programme.


- Listen and read
- Check their answers



Present, run through the questions and answer them.


1. Laughing out Loud.

2. VTV3
3. No, they aren't.
4. Because he is awful.
5. Tom is stupid, but funny.

Find the adjectives describing each character in the conversation and write them.
Mr Bean: funny,awful
Tom: stupid, funny
Jerry: intelligent

Find the adjectives describing each character in the conversation and write them
Individual work
Yes: Popular, historical, serious, long, educational, boring, funny, good, live, entertaining.
No: beautiful, small.

- Ss work individually
1. national television
2. news programme
3. local television
4. comedy
5. game show
6. animal programme

- Ss work individually
- Ss share answers with their partner.


1/ national
2/ comedy
3/ channels
4/ competition
5/ Cartoons
6/ educational


- Ss work in groups
Write down two things they like about television and two things they don't like about it. Talk to other in their group and see how many people share their ideas.


- Ss tell their friends about their favorite TV programme and the reason.


- Answer individually


- Take note
* Adjustment:
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***
Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 6/ 1/ 2015
Period 58 UNIT 7: TELEVISION
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
+/ Use the lexical items related to television
+/ Pronunciation /?/ and / /
B. Content:
Vocabulary: MC, viewer, TV schedule, weatherman, newsreader, remote control.
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities

Students' activities
Warmer (5'):
? Look at the pictures on page 8 and answer my questions
? Who are they and what are these?
- Introduce the new lesson.
I. Vocabulary (15')
1. Teaching vocab
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.





* Checking vocab: Slap the board
1. Write the words/ phrases in the box under the pictures.
Ask Ss to work in groups to write the words/ phrases in the box under the pictures
- Play the recording and let Ss listen
? Listen and read then check your answer.

- Play it again and pause for them to repeat each word.
- Correct their pronunciation.
2. Choose a word from the box for each description below.

? - Ask Ss to work individually.


? - Ask them to share answers with their partner.

- Teacher gets feedback
3. Game.
- Ask Ss to refer to 2 and the suggusted structures in 3 to see how a word is defined.
- Ask Ss to work in groups to do this exercise.
- Help SS by writing some promts on the board so that SS can imitate.
EX:
Newsreader: A person who reads news
? - Ask them to share answers with other groups.
- Teacher gets feedback
II. Pronunciation (15')
- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds / ? / and / /.
? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds
4. Listen and repeat the words.
- Practice sounding out the sound
/ ? / and / / together
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the words in the order they hear.
- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to repeat.
5. Which words in 4 have / ? / and which words have / /? Listen again and write them in the corect column.
- Play the tape twice
? Work individually to put the words into two groups.
? Check your answers in groups.
- Have two students write on the board.
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary.
III. Production ( 6')
6. Tongue Twister
- Play the recroding
? Ask the Ss to take turns reading the sentence quickly and correctly.
IV. Consolidation (2')
? How to make the sounds / ? / and / /
? Find some more words that have these two sounds
.V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2
1. Warm up.

- Ss look at the pictures then answer the questions


*/ New words.
- MC (n) ng??i d?n ch??ng trnh.
- viewer (n) ng??i xem ti vi
- TV schedule (n) l?ch pht CT ti vi
- weatherman (n) ng??i thng bo tin th?i ti?t trn ?i ho?c TV
- newsreader (n) ng??i ??c b?n tin trn ?i, truy?n hnh.
- remote control (n) ?i?u khi?n t? xa
- Checking vocab: Slap the board


Ss work in groups to write the words/ phrases in the box under the pictures
KEY
1- newsreader
2- TV schedule
3- MC
4- viewer
5- remote control
6- weatherman

- Ss work individually
- Ss share answers with their partner.
KEY
1- weatherman
2- newsreader
3- remote control
4- MC
5- volume button
6- TV viewer


- Listen to the teacher
- Ss work in groups
- Ss share answers with other groups.
1. newsreader: a person who reads news
2. Weatherman: a man who gives a weather forecast
Comedian: a person whose job is to make people laugh by telling jokes and funny stories


- Listen to the teacher



- Practice sounding out the sound
/ ? / and / / together
- Ss number the words in the order they hear.
- Listen and repeat




listen again and write them in the corect column. Then check the answer key .
/ ? /: theatre, thanhsgiving, earth, anything, both, through
/ /: there, them, neither, weatherman
than, feather


- Listen and take turns reading the sentence.



- Answer the question.




- Do as directed

* Adjustment:
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***















Date of planning: 4/1/2015
Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2015
Period 59
UNIT 7: TELEVISION
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2

A. Objectives:
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use conjunctions (and, but, because...) and question words (where, who, why ...) correctly.
B. Content:
- Grammar: Conjunctions + Wh - questions.
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:

Teacher's activities

Students' activities
1. Warm up. Chatting
- Discuss some real questions.
1. What are you doing now ?
2. How do you go to school ?
3. How far is it from your house to school?
2. Presentation.
1. Read the conversation and underline
the question words.
- Ask Ss to ask and answer the questions in order to see the function of each. Then underline the question words.
* Question Words
- T asks some questions and ask SS to find out the question words.
- Teacher gets feedback
3. Practice.
2. Use one of the question words in
the box to complete the conversations.
- When, Where, How often, Who, What
- Suggest Ss look at the answer in order to choose the correct question word.
- Ask Ss to work individually by guessing.
- Play the tape. Let Ss to look at the conversations as they listen and check their answers.
- Teacher gets feedback
3. Complete the conversation about The Wingless Penguin with suitable question words.
? - Ask Ss to work in pairs.

? - Ask them to share answers with their partner.

- Teacher gets feedback
*Conjunctions:
4. Use but, and, so, because, although to complete sentences.
- T gives some conjunctions then explain the way to use.
- Explain that there is always comma with so and although.
- T writes the example on the board, then guides the way to do.

5. Match the beginnings and the endings.




- T can go around the class and explain the students how to do. Then give the correct answers and ask Ss to check
-Ss liten and correct their answer.



6. Work in groups.

- Guide the Ss do this exercise.
- Ask Ss to asks and answer in groups using the out line given in Ss' books.



- T correct mistakes if neccessary.

4. Production.
? Tell your friends about television in Viet Nam.
5. Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.


- Answer the questions.



1. Read the conversation and underline
the question words.
Ss ask and answer the questions in order to see the function of each. Then underline the question words.

KEY
1- What
2- Where
3- How long

2. Use one of the question words in
the box to complete the conversations.

- Ss look at the answer in order to choose the correct question word.
- Ss work individually by guessing.

Keys:
1. How often, What
2. Who
3. When, Where
3. Complete the conversation about The Wingless Penguin with suitable question words.
Keys:
A. What
A. What
A. How many
A. Why?
A. What time/When

4. Use but, and, so, because, although to complete sentences.
- Listen to the teacher.
KEY
1- and
2- but
3- Although
4- because
5- so
5. Match the beginnings and the endings.
KEY
1- Watching too much TV is not good
because it hurts your eyes
2- I will get up early tomorrow, so I can
be at the stadium in time.
3- Sometimes we read books and
sometimes we play sports.
4- My little brother can colour a picture
but he cannot draw.
5- Although Ann preferred going out, she stayed at home.
6. Work in groups.
KEY
- What is the name of the national TV chanel?
- How many hours does it broadcast? / How long is it on?
- (It depends on each student.)
- How much does cable TV cost per month?
- Who is your favourite TV person?

- Do as directed.


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.

* Adjustment:
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

***==***==***==***==***==***==***==***




















Date of planning: 11/1/2015
Date of teaching: 12/ 1/ 2015
Period 60
UNIT 7 TELEVISION
Lesson 4 Communication
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to :
- Read a TV schedule and descriptions of famous children's programmes for specific information .
- Ss get to know some strange / famous facts relating to television around the world .
II. Teaching aids: Computer , Poster, pictures.
III.Proceduces.
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. Warm up:
* Chatting :
Ask Ss to ask and answer about their favorite programme .


* Chatting
S1 : What is your favorite programme ?
S2 : ....................................................
S1: Which channel is it on ?
S2 :......................................................
II. New lesson.

- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, explaination )

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.

* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R

III : Practice :
Act1: Complete the facts below with the name of the correct country .
Ask Ss to complete the facts below with the name of the correct country
- Ask Ss to share their answers in pairs, before giving the answers.

1/ New words:
- clumsy: V?ng v?
- mini-series : phim truy?n hnh
- cute : d? th??ng
- entertain : gi?i tr
- detective : thm t?
- adventure : Cu?c phiu l?u
- audience : Khn gi?
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R
Act1: Complete the facts below with the name of the correct country .
Ss complete the facts below with the name of the correct country
share the answers in pairs, before checking the answers and copying them into the noterbook .
* Key :
1. Japan
2. Vietnam ,
3. Iceland
4 .the USA
5. Finland
6. Britain
Act 2: Do you agree with the following statements ?
-Ask SS to discuss and talk freely
Ask Ss to read the questions and answer the questions
- Ask Ss some more questions to check their knowledge
Act 3 a : Read about two famous TV programmes for children .
- Ask SS to read and use it as a model for their talk about their favorite programme
After finishing reading , ask Ss to return to Act 2 and see if they want to change any of their previous answers
Act 3 a : Read the facts in the table and tick the correct programmes .
- Let Ss read the texts while they answer the questions .
- Give the answer key .

IV. Production
Act 4 : Work in group
Allow SS about 2-3 minutes to choose the programme they prefer and prepare for their speaking .
- Encourage ss to focus on explaining why they like it .


- SS discuss and talk freely
- Then work in pair to read and answer the questions aloud .
-SS answer some more questions


- Read about two famous TV programmes for children .
- Ss read and use it as a model for their talk about their favorite programme .
-Return to Act 2 and see if they want to change any of their previous answers .

- Ss read the texts again then answer the questions .
- Copy the answer key .
1. Both programmes .
2. Let's learn
3. Hello Fatty !
4.Let's learn
5. Hello Fatty !
6.Let's learn
- SS choose the programme they prefer and prepare for their speaking .
- Try to focus on explaining why they like it .

V. Home work.

-Summarize the main points of the lesson..
Learn the new words
- -Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 1.
* Adjustment:
..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Date of planning: 11/1/2015
Date of teaching: 13/ 1/ 2015
Period 61
UNIT 7 TELEVISION
Lesson 4 Skills 1 + Project

I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to : - Read a TV schedule for specific information.
- Talk about a favorite TV programme .
II. Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III.Procedures :
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I . Warm up:
* Guessing game :
Ask one student to talk about the programme he/she likes watching then ask all the class try to guess "What programme is it ?" .


One Student talk about the programme he/she likes watching then all the class try to guess "What programme is it ?" .



II. New lesson :
1. Teaching vocab
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.





* Checking vocab: Slap the board


A. Reading:
Activity1 :Read the schedule for around the world !
Ask Ss to read the schedule .
T asks Ss to read the schedule again then answer the questions about the time , the name of the programme , and its content .
-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.
-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.
-T corrects the answers:
Act ivity 2 : Answer the following questions about the schedule :
_ Have Ss scan the schedule again and find the information to answer .
_ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
_ Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
_ T checks and corrects it .



Activity 3 : Read the information about the people below and choose the best programme for each .
- Ask Ss to work in group 4 to do this activity .
- T goes around the class to help Ss if necessary .
- T checks and corrects then give the answer key .

1. Vocabulary :
documentary : Phim ti li?u
Pacific : Thi bnh d??ng
instructor :Hu?n luy?n vin .
compete : ?ua
Jungle : R?ng nhi?t ??i
Knowledge : S? hi?u bi?t
Discover : Khm ph
universe : V? Tr?

Read the schedule

- Read the schedule again then answer the questions about the time , the name of the programme , and its content




2. Anwer the questions:
Ss scan the schedule again and find the information to answer
* Key:
1/ Wheelbarrow Race
2/ The Porrot Instructor .
3/ Yes , we can .
4/ A doccumentary about the colourful world in the Pacific .
5/ No, it isn't .

- Ss work in group 4 :
-Read the information about the people below and choose the best programme for each .
Key :
1. Phong : Science : Journey to Jupiter.
2. Bob : Comedy : The Parrot Instructor
3. Nga : Game show : Children are Always Right .
4. Minh : sport : Wheelbarrow Races .
5. Linh : Animal : Ocean Life

B. Speaking:
* Activity 4 : Work in group 4 :
Ask students to tell the group about their favorite TV programme . Their talk should include the following information :
Encourage ss to focus on explaining why they like it .




T reviews the expressions they can use to talk .
C. Project
- Ask Ss to work in groups.
- Ss interview their friends, using the questions given in the textbook.


-Tell the group about the favorite TV programme . The talk should include the following information .

Try to explain the reason They like it



- My favourite programme is ???
- The name of the programme is ???.
- It's on ?????..channel.
- It's about??????(content)
- I like it because ???.






"How important is TV to you?"
- SS answer the questions below Then report their results to the class.
1. What do you prefer doing in your free time?
2. How many hours a day do you watch television?
3. Why do you watch TV?
4. Which of the following do you like to get information from?
5. How long do you think you can live without TV?
III. Homework:
Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the lesson and prepare skills 2.

.
-Review the lesson.
-Prepare skills 2.


..........................................................................................................................................

























Making date: 11/1/2015
Teaching date:14/1/2015
PERIOD 62

UNIT 7 : MY NEIGHBOURHOOD
LESSON 6: SKILLs 2: LISTENING - WRITING

I. Objectives:
- Listening for specific information from a recommended TV schedule .
- Writing a short guided passage about one's TV- watching habits .
II. Teaching aids: - Computer ,Posters, cassette.
III. Proceduces :

Teacher' activities
Teacher's activities
I. WARM-UP: Network

- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct



News
II. NEW LESSON
A. Listening.

* Pre - listening :
-Present some new words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.


* Checking vocab: Rub out and remmember.
Activity 1 .
Listen and check the correct channel for each programme .
-Ask ss to read the schedule aloud .

* While - listening :
- Have Ss listen to the recording twice .
- Ask Ss to only focus on the information they need



- T checks and corrects then give the answer key






* Post - listening :
- Play the recording again and ask Ss to check statememts 1-5 .
- Ask SS to take notes about the time for each programme and use them as reference
1. Vocabulary :
Spend : tr?i qua , dnh
Compare : so snh
outdoor : ngoi tr?i
turn off : t?t
habit : thi quen .
squirrel : con sc
Giraffe : con h??u
comment : l?i bnh lu?n .
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R


- Read the schedule aloud



-Listen to the recording twice
-Focus on the information they need .
- Ss listen and tick the correct channel for each programme . Share their answer together
- check answer key :
1. Music : Channel 1
2. Cartoon : Channel 2
3. Film : Channel 3
4.Home and garden : Channel 2
5. Our Heritage : Channel 3

2. Listen again and tick statements 1 - 5 with T or F
Key:
1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F



B. Writing

- Let each S read the questionnaire and choose the most appropriate answer for him/her.
- Check on Ss' answers.
- Help Ss organize their ideas for writing.
- Ask Ss to look at the suggested structure for the writing.
- Go around and correct some
- Display all or some of the leaflets on the wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T comments..
- SS work in groups to discuss what they like or dislike about TV .



3. What are your TV - watching habit?
* Suggested structure:
- I don't watch much TV/ I enjoy watching TV.
- I spend ??hour(s) watching TV.
- I like ???/ I usually watch ????
- I usually leave the TV on ?/ turn off the TV
- I think I have good/bad TV watching habits.


- Discuss what they like or dislike about TV .
III. HOMEWORK
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
- Write something they like or dislike about TV.
--Prepare new lesson: Looking back.

..........................................................................................................................................



Making date: 18/1/2015
Teaching date:19/1/2015
PERIOD 63

Unit 7: TELEVISION
Lesson : 7 Looking back

I. Objectives :
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:
+ lexical items rerated to television.
+ conjunctions (and, but, because,.) and question words (where, who, why, ?.)
+ conversations about a TV programme.
* Teaching aids: posters, cassette and tape.
II. Teaching steps.
Teacher 's activities
Students' activities
I. WARM-UP
- Ask 2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk about their TV - watching habits.
- Give remarks and marks.
.
"What are your TV - watching habits?"
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Put the words in the box in the correct columns. Add more words if you can.
- Tell Ss to write the words the draff individually and then share their answer with their partners,
T corrects their mistakes then give the answer key.
- Let Ss repeat the words.
- Check Ss' pronunciation.
2. Use the words in the box to fill the text.

- Ask Ss read the text carefully and complete them with the words in the box.
- Remind Ss that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blanks will provide the context for them to choose the correct words.

B. Grammar
3. Use a question word to make a suitable for each answer.

- Ask Ss to look at the answers and decide which question words is to be used.
- Call some Ss to give their answers.
- Give corrections if necessary.

4. Use the conjunction provided to connect the sentences.
- Let Ss do the task separately
- Comment and check Ss' answers then give the key .








C. Communication
5. Rearrange the order of the sentences to have a complete conversation about a TV programme.
- Ask Ss to work in pair and reorder the conversation.
- Call some pairs to check and correct.
- Ask some pairs to practice reading aloud to check their pronunciation.

1. Put the words in the box in the correct columns. Add more words if you can.

- Write the words the draff individually and then share their answer with their partners
Key:
1. People: newsreader, weatherman, writer, MC
2. Programme: cartoon, game show, animals, home and garden.
3. Kinds of film: documentary, romance


2. Use the words in the box to fill the text.
-Read the text carefully and complete them with the words in the box.


Key:
1. national 2. viewers
3. 7 o'clock news 4. Comedies
5. relax 6. Game show
7. educational 8. Writers

3. Use a question word to make a suitable for each answer.
Ss look at the answers and decide which question words is to be used.

Key:
1. How many 2. What
3. Why 4. Who 5. When

4. Use the conjunction provided to connect the sentences.
Ss do the task separately :
Key: 1. Ocean Life is on at 7.30 and Laughing out Loud will follow, at 8.00
2. I have watched The Seven Kitties many times because I like the film so much.
3. BBC One is a British channel but VTV 6 is Vietnamese channel.
4. Although Along The Coast is a famous TV series, I have never watched it.
5. I have a lot of homework tonight, so I can't watch Eight Feet Below.
5. Rearrange the order of the sentences to have a complete conversation about a TV programme.


-Ss work in pair to reorder the conversation
Key:
A C B D F H G E I K

III. HOMEWORK.
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Assign home work.
- Ss rewrite the correct order conversation in 5 in their notebooks
- Prepare Getting started - Unit 8




Making date: 18/1/2015
Teaching date:20/1/2015
PERIOD 64
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Understand activities at the gym, review vocabs about school things and use the combinations: go, play, do + N/V-ing.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warm up (5'):
Network: Programmes on TV

(?) Who can give me some programmes on TV?
Network

Film Sports



Games News

B. NEW LESSON
Vocabulary (5')
- Present new words.




- Check: Rub out and Remember.



- Get Ss to read and check new words.
B. NEW LESSON
* Vocabulary
+ gym /?im/: trung tm th? d?c
+ equipment /i'kwipm?nt/: thi?t b?, d?ng c?
+ congratulation/k?n,grtju'lei?n/ : s? chc m?ng
+ fit (a): m?nh kh?e
+ ski /ski:/: tr??t tuy?t-> skiing: mn ?
+ useful (a)/'ju:sful/: c ch
+ waste (v):/weist/: lng ph
- Take notes
Listen and read (30')
- Show the picture ( Ask Ss to look at the picture on P16), then give Ss some questions:
+ Who do you see in the picture ?
+ Where are they ? What do you think they're talking about ?
- Ask Ss to guess what it shows or what the conversation between Duong and Mai might be about.
- Plays the recording twice.
- Call Ss to practise the dialogue in pairs
a) Ask Ss to work independently or in pairs to answer the questions.





- Check their answer and give the feedback.


b) Colloquial expression:/k?'loukwi?l/: S? bi?u c?m thng th??ng.
- Refer Ss to the conversation to find the phrases.
- Play the recording again if necessary, then ask Ss to practise saying them together.


- Explain or give the synonyms to the Ss, then give some examples.
c) Make dialogue with the expressions.
- Direct Ss to practise the short conversations in pairs before creating their short-role plays.



2, Listen and repeat these words and phrases:
- Play the recording
- Let Ss listen and repeat. Check and correct their pronunciation. Give them the meaning of the words.
- Ask Ss if these sports and games are played in Viet Nam.
3, Name these sports and games.
- Ask Ss to write the correct words in the spaces.
- Check their doings and give the feedback.
- Help Ss to distinguish between a sport and a game:
A sport: an activity that you do for pleasure and that you need physical exercise.
A game: an activity or a sport with rules in which people or teams compete against each other.

4, Put the words from 2 in the correct groups:

- Let Ss work in pairs and put the words in the correct group.
- Check the Ss'answers, then give the feedback.

5. Put the correct form of the verbs play, do, go, watch and like in the blanks.
- Allow Ss time to do the task individually.
- Call Ss to write their answer on the board and ask the class to comment and give them the correct answers.
6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner these questions to find out how sporty they are.
- Let Ss work in pairs or groups asking and answering the questions.
- Move around the class to help / encourage Ss to do their task.
- Call some pairs to demonstrate their results in front of the class.
1. Listen and read: At the gym
- Look at the picture and answer the questions



- Guess

- Listen to the tape

- Pairs work
a) Answer the questions independently or in pairs
Keys:
1. He can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is
3. Because the equipment is modern and the people are friendly.
4. Duong played with Duy and won ( for the first time).
5. At the karate club.
b) Colloquial expression:
- Pay much attention to the lesson.
Key: 1. Wow: used to express surprise.
2. Congratulation: used to congratule sb/ to tell sb that you are pleased about their success
3. Great: used to show admiration.
4. See you (then): used when you say goodbye.
c) Make dialogue with the expressions.
A: Congratulation! You've won the first prize on English speaking contest.
B: Thank you.
C: Great! You did very well.
D: ??.
2, Listen and repeat these words and phrases:


- Listen and repeat the words


3, Name these sports and games.

Keys:
1. cycling 2. table tennis
3. running 4. swimming
5. chess 6. skiing
- Give some examples:
A sport: baseball, volleyball, soccer, skiing?.
A game: chess, ?
4, Put the words from 2 in the correct groups:
Key:
Play: chess, table tennis, volleyball, tennis
Do: boxing, aerobics, karate
Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running, skiing.
5. Put the correct form of the verbs play, do, go, watch and like in the blanks.

Key:
1. do 2. is watching 3. goes
4. likes 5. played
6. Work in pairs. Ask your partner these questions to find out how sporty they are.
- Work in pairs or groups asking and answering the questions.


- Some pairs to demonstrate their results in front of the class.

Consolidation (3')
? What is the topic of the lesson today?

- Answer individually

Homework(2')
- Ask Ss to review vocabulary about sports and games.
- Prapare the next lesson

- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
- Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.
???????????????????????????????????..


Making date: 18/1/2015
Teaching date:21/1/2015
PERIOD 65
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 2: A CLOSER LOOK 1

A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to:
- Pronounce the sounds /e? / and /i?/ correctly in isolation and in context and use lexical items related to the topic "Sports and Games"
- Training reading, speaking skills.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities

Students' activities
Warm up (5'):
Network: Sports and Games
Who can give me some sports and games?
- Introduce the new lesson.


I. Vocabulary (15')
1. Teaching vocab
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)

- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Slap the board
1. Listen and repeat the words.
Ask Ss to look at the pictures on p18
- Play the recording and let Ss listen
? Listen and read then check your answer.
- Play it again and pause for them to repeat each word.
2. Now write the words under the pictures.
? - Ask Ss to work in groups.


? - Ask them to share answers with other groups.


- Teacher gets feedback


3. What sports are these things for? Match the things in column A with a sport/game in column B.
- Ask Ss to do the task independently first.

- Call Ss to write their answers on the board, then check
II. Pronunciation (15')
- Explain how to pronounce the two sounds / e? / and /i? /.

? Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds
4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds / e? / and /i? /.
- Asks Ss to practice sounding out the sound
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the words in the order they hear.
- Play the recording again and ask the Ss to repeat.
5. Read the words and say them aloud. Which one has / e? / or /i? /.
- Play the tape twice
? Work individually to put the words into two groups.
? Check your answers in groups.
- Have two students write on the board.
- Correct Ss' mistakes if necessary.
III. Production ( 6')
6. Listen to the sentences and choose the right words.
- Play the recroding
? Ask the Ss to repeat sentence by sentence.

- Help Ss recognize the two sounds, then underline the words in the sentences.

IV. Consolidation (2')
? How to make the sounds / e? / and /i? /.
? Find some more words that have these two sounds
.V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2
Warm up. Network
Cycling Chess



Running Karate
*/ New words.
- boat: con thuy?n
- goggles /'g?glz/ (n): knh b?i
- skateboard (n,v): vn tr??t, tr??t vn
- racket /'rkit/ (n): ci v?t
- sphere/sfi?/ : hnh c?u, qu? c?u
- Checking vocab: Slap the board
1. Listen and repeat the words.

- Listen and repeat the words.



2. Now write the words under the pictures.
Ss work in groups to write the words/ phrases in the box under the pictures
KEY
1- a bicycle 2- a ball
3- sports shoes 4- skis
5- a boat 6- a racquet
7- a skateboard 8- goggles
- Ss work individually
3. What sports are these things for? Match the things in column A with a sport/game in column B.
KEY
1-c 2- d 3- a 4-e
5- g 6- h 7- b 8- f

II. Pronunciation (15')

- Listen to the teacher
- Ss work in groups
- Ss share answers with other groups.
4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds / e? / and /i? /.
- Practice sounding out the sound
1. / e? /: where, there, fair, pair, prepare
2. /i? /: here, fear, nearly, idea, volunteer.

5. Read the words and say them aloud. Which one has / e? / or /i? /.
- Listen to the tape
Key:
1.A 2.C 3.B
4.A 5.B 6.A



6. Listen to the sentences and choose the right words.
- Practice sounding out the sound
/ e? / and /i? / together
- Listen and repeat
Key:
1. fair 2. hear 3. ida
4. square 5. nearly 6. cheere
- Listen and take turns reading the sentence.

- Answer the question.


- Do as directed













Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:26/1/2015
PERIOD 66
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 3: A CLOSER LOOK 2
A. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss can review the past simple tense and do exercises and this tense.
- Ss can use imperatives to tell sb to do st or to give a direct order.
B. Content:
- Grammar: Past simple tense ( Regular and irregular verbs )
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
2. Warm up. Pelnalism:
- Write the past form of these verbs:




2. Presentation.
Past Simple tense:
- We use the Past Simple tense to talk aboutt a finished action in the past. We often say when it happened.
Notes:
* Regular verbs: V+ed
* Irregualr verbs: V2 ( was, were, had, went....)
3. Practice.
1. Complete the sentences with did, was or were
- Ask Ss to work in pairs to give the answers.
- Help / Observe Ss when necessary and correct Ss' mistakes.

- Teacher gives feedback
2. Write the correct form of the verbs to complete the conversation.
? - Ask Ss to work individually.
- Correct their answers and may call on some Ss separately to say their answers for the class.
- Give explanation when necessary
? - Ask Ss to read the conversation with the correct verbs forms. Correct their pronunciation and intonation.

3. Work in group. Ask and answer questions anout last weekend.
- T divides the class into 4 or 5 groups. Ss take turns asking and answering questions about their last weekend. Some more able Ss can report to the class about one of their friends.
- T can ask Ss to give the rule for using each of the tenses they have learnt. T writes Ss'rules down on the board. Then T tells Ss that they are going to learn one more tense.
Imperatives:
- T tells Ss the form and the use of imperatives and give some examples.
Form: (+) V + .....
(-) Don't + V + .....
-> Used to ask someone to do something, or to give a direct order.
4. Write sentences to tell your friends what to do or not to do.
- ? Ss work individually, write their answers


- Call Ss to read aloud their answers

- Correct mistakes if necessary.
5. Tell your friends what to do or not to do at the gym.
- Let Ss work in pairs or in groups, take turns telling their friends what to do and not to do at the gym.
- Help Ss and let them give as many sentences as possible.
- T can go around the class and explain the students how to do. Then give the correct answers and ask Ss to check
4. Production.( Further Practice)
? If there is time, let Ss take turns giving an order or telling their friends to do an activity and act out the order.
5. Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.


- Answer the questions.




- Review Past simple tense:
(+) S + Ved / 2 + ...
(-) S + didn't + V + .....
(?) Did + S + V + ....?
Yes, S + did
No, S + didn't



1. Complete the sentences with did, was or were
KEY
1- were
2- was
3- was- did- was
4- Did -were-did-was
2. Write the correct form of the verbs to complete the conversation.
- Ss work individually.
- Read the conversation with the correct verbs forms and pronunciation and intonation.
Keys:
1. was 2. didn't do
3. sat 4. watched 5. went
6. had 7. did 8. visited
9. ate 10. scored
3. Work in group. Ask and answer questions anout last weekend.


Example:
S1: Did you play any sports last weekend?
S2: Yes, and I enjoyed myself so much.
S1: Really? What did you do ?
S2: I .................

Imperatives:



- Pay much attention to the teacher.

- take notes
4. Write sentences to tell your friends what to do or not to do.
KEY
1- Take your umbrella.
2- Please don't litter.
3- Please hurry up.
4- ...don't train too hard.
5- Put on your coat.
5. Work in pairs or groups.
KEY
- Pay your fee first
- Put on your trainers / sports shoes.
- Listen to the instructor carefully.
- Don't litter.
- Don't eat or drink at the gym.
- Don't speak and laugh loudly.
....................



- Do as directed.


- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.

???????????????????????????????????..







Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:27/1/2015
PERIOD 67
- UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 4: Communication

A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Read the new vocabulary.
- Understand about the five rings represent the five major regions of the World.
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. Warm up:
* Chatting:
Ask Ss to ask and answer about their favorite sports.


* Chatting
S1 : What is your favorite sport ?
S2 : ....................................................
S1: Do you like football ?
S2 :......................................................
S1: How often is the O.Games held ?
S2 :......................................................
II. New lesson.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, explaination )
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
- Explain the 5 interlocked rings: The five rings represent the five major regions of the World ( Africa, the America, Asia, Europe and Oceania) and every national flag in the world has at least one of the five colors ( blue, yellow, black, greeen, and red)
* Vocabulary checking: R.O.R
III: Practice:
Act1: Sports quiz. Work in pairs. Do the quiz.



- Ask Ss to work in pairs and find the answers to the quizzes.



- Give the correct answers.

1/ New words:
- fit (a): m?nh kh?e
- last (v): ko di
- marathon /'mr???n/: ch?y maratng
- ring (n): vng trn
- achievement(n): thnh tch, thnh t?u

- Pay much attention to the teacher.


* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R

Act1: Complete the facts below with the name of the correct country .
- Ss work in pairs and find the answers to the quizzes.
* Key:
1. There are usually 22 players (11 on each side)
2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (divide into 2 halves)
3. They are held every four years
4 . No, there weren't Olympic Games in 2011. (They were held in 004,2008,2012...
5. A marathon is 42,195 kilometer long (26 miles and 385 yards)
6. They were held in Olympia (in Ancient Greece in 776 BC)
7. Boxing does.
Act 2: In pairs, interview your partner using the following questions. Ask for more information.
- Ask SS to work in pairs to do the task.
Ask and answer the questions




- Encourage Ss to talk and raise as many questions as possible.




Act 3: Think of a sportsman/ sportwoman you like. Talk about him/ her with a partner. Using the cues.
- Divide the class into groups of four or five, encourage Ss to talk about their favorite sportsperson one by one. Using these questions:
+ What is his / her name?
+What sport does he/ she play?
+What were her/ his last achievements ?
+ Why do you like him/ her?
IV. Production:
- Encourage ss to speak about their favorite sportsperson they like in front of the class.
Act 2: interview your partner using the following questions. Ask for more information.
- Work in pairs to do the task. Ask and answer the questions
Possible answers:
1. I often play....
2. I play badminton, soccer, shutlle cock..
3. I like watching sports show like football match, tennis/ badminton...
4. Ss'answer
5. Yes, I'd like to learn to play.....
6. Name famous sportspersons:
Footballer: C.Ronaldo, Messi, N.C. Vinh
Tennis player: Federa, Nadan, William
Act 3: Think of a sportsman/ sportwoman you like. Talk about him/ her with a partner. Using the cues.
- Work in groups of four or five.




- Talk about the sportsperson they like by answering these questions:



- Ss speak about their favorite sportsperson they like in front of the class.
V. Home work.
- Summarize the main points of the lesson.
- Learn the new words
- Review the lesson.
- Prepare skill 1








Making date: 25/1/2015
Teaching date:28/1/2015
PERIOD 68
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 5: SKILLS 1
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Read for specific information about famous sportsperson "The King of Football".
- Talk about the activities/ sports / games they do in their spare time.
B. Content:
- Adverbs of frequency
- How often?.?
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I . Warm up:
* Guessing game:
Ask one student to talk about the sportsperson he/she likes , then ask all the class try to guess "Who is this in the picture ?"

One Student talk about the sportsperson he/she likes watching then all the class try to guess "Who is this in the picture ?".

II. New lesson:
1. Teaching vocab
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Slap the board
A. Reading:
1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions:
- Ask Ss to dicuss the questions in pairs. Encourage them to give their ideas as many as possible.




2: Read the text quickly to check your ideas in 1.
- Have Ss scan the text again and check the ideas in 1.
- Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
- Feedback: 2 Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it.
3: Read again and answer the questions.
- Ask Ss to read the text again and find the information to answer.

- T goes around the class to help Ss if necessary.


- T checks and corrects then gives the answer key.
Vocabulary:
- regard /ri'g?:d/: quan tm, knh tr?ng
- professional: chuyn nghi?p
- score (v) ghi bn
- vote (v): b?u
- well-known (a): n?i ti?ng
* Checking vocab: Slap the board

1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions:
- Dicuss the questions in pairs.
Suggested answers:
1. Yes, I do. He is regarded as the King of Football.
2. He comes from Brazil.
3. He won the first World Cup when he was 17.
2: Read the text quickly to check your ideas in 1.

- Ss scan the text again and check the ideas in 1.



3: Read again and answer the questions.
- Read the information about Pele and answer the questions: Key: 1. He was born on 21st October 1940. 2. People call him "The King of Football " because he is such a good football player. 3. He became Football Player of the Century in 1999. 4. He scored 1,281 goals in total. 5. Yes, he is.
B. Speaking
4. How often do you go/do/play these sports/games? Tick the right column:





- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick the right column.







5. Work in groups. What kind of sports/games do you do most often? Why?
- Ask students to work in groups to ask and answer the question. They should refer the information in table 4.
- Encourage Ss to focus on explaining why they like it.
6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the following questions.
- Divide the class into groups of 4 or 5. Let them discuss their answers to the questions.
Report the results to the class.
- When Ss finish, ask one student from each group " What is the most interesting thing you learnt from your discussion?"
4. How often do you go/do/play these sports/games? Tick the right column:
- Read the table and tick the right column.
Sports/ Games
always
usually
some
times
never
1. Jogging




2. Swimming




3. Badminton




5. Football




6. Morning exercise




7. Skipping




8. Chess




9. Cycling




10. Skateboarding




11. Skiing





5. Work in groups. What kind of sports/games do you do most often? Why?

-Work in groups of 4 or 5 and discuss their answers to the questions.


6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the following questions.
- Call Ss to report their results to the class.
Suggested answers:
1. Yes, I do / No, I don't
2. I play football / I only watch it.
3. I play ?; No, I've just played it for a few days.
4. Yes, I do / No, I don't
5. I often read books in the library./ I??
III. Homework:
- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the lesson and prepare skills 2.

- Review the lesson.
- Prepare skills 2.


























Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:2/2/2015
PERIOD 69
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Listening to get information about the sports/ games people play.
- Writing a paragraph about the sport/ game they like.
B. Content: Listening and writing
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher' activities
Students' activities
I. WARM-UP: Network
(?) Can you tell me the names of TV programmes?
- Ask Ss to work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct



jogging
II. NEW LESSON
A. Listening.
* Pre - listening:
- Present some new words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.
* Checking vocab: Rub out and remmember.
* While - listening:
Activity 1.
Listen to the pasage. Who are they about?

- Play the recording once only. Ask Ss to listen and say who the passage are about.

2. Listen to the pasage again. Then write T or F for each sentence.
- Have Ss listen to the recording twice.
- Ask Ss to only focus on the information they need.
- T checks and corrects then give the answer key
* Post - listening:
3. Listen to the pasage again. Fill in each blank to complete the sentences.
- Play the recording again and ask Ss to fill in each blank to complete the sentences
- Check Ss'answers and give the feedback.

1. Vocabulary:
- create (v) /kri:'eit/ : t?o ra
- hobby = interest: s? thch
- to be good/ bad at: gi?i / km v?
* Vocabulary checking : R.O.R

Activity 1.
- Listen to the recording once only.
- Focus on the information they need.
Key:
1, Hai 2, Alice 3, Bill 4, Trung
Activity 2.
- Ss listen and write T or F for each sentence. Share their answer together
- check answer key:
1-F 2-T 3-T 4-F 5-T



Activity 3.
- Listen to the tape again and fill in the blank.
- Key:
1. Club 2. Play 3. Watching
4. Bill 5. goes
B. Writing
Pre-writing: Braistorming






- Allow Ss to refer to the reading and other sections for useful language. Note interesting expressions and language on the board.
- Tell Ss to write draft first, Ss should use the cues and their own ideas.
While-writing:
Write about a sport/ game you like. Use your own ideas and the following as cues
- Help Ss organize their ideas for writing.
- Ask Ss to look at the suggested questions for the writing.
- Encourage Ss to write a paragraph of about 80-100 words about the sport / game they like, covering as many ideas as possible.
- Ask Ss to pay special attention to punctuation, structural elements, linking words.
Post-writing:
- Collect one or some Ss'writing papers and mark them, then give comments to the class.
Brainstorming:

- Write things related to sports/ games they like:
Name, team/individual sport, time, player, equipment.


- Pay much attention to the lesson

- Write draft first, Ss should use the cues and their own ideas.



- Look at the suggested questions for the writing.
- Write a paragraph of about 80-100 words about the sport / game they like, covering as many ideas as possible.

- Pay special attention to punctuation, structural elements, linking words.



- Correct mistakes if necessary.
III. HOMEWORK
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Assign home work.
- Ss edit and revise their writing as homework.
- Prepare new lesson: Looking back.
Adjustment:
???????????????????????????????????

Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:3/2/2015
PERIOD 70
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK + PROJECT
A. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review:
+ lexical items related to sports / games.
+ Past simple tense and imperatives
+ Games: "Blind man's bluff."
B. Content:
1. Vocabulary: Sports and games
2. Grammar: + The past simple
+ Imperatives
C. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: Group work, individual work
D. Procedures:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. WARM-UP
What is your favourite sport / game?
- Ask 2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk about their favourite sport/ game.
- Give remarks and marks.


2 - 3 Ss come to the board and talk about their favourite sport/ game.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Find one odd word or phrase in each line.
- Tell Ss to find the words individually and then share their answer with their partners,
T corrects their mistakes then give the answer key.
- Let Ss repeat the words.
- Check Ss' pronunciation.
2. Read the four words in each line. Write the name of the game or sport the four words belong to.
- Ask Ss repeat the words .
- Check Ss' pronunciation.

- Tell Ss to write the answers in the notebooks.
- Correct mistakes.
B. Grammar
3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the correct form.
- Ask Ss to supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets.
- Call some Ss to give their answers.

- Give corrections if necessary.

4. What did you say in these situations ?

- Let Ss do the task in pairs or groups to finish or write the sentence

- Comment and check Ss' answers then give the key.

5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish the pasage.
- Ask Ss to do the task individually first. They they can check their answers with their partners before discussing the answers as a class.
- Give corrections.
- Have some Ss read the whole passage aloud
C. Communication
6. Match the questions in A with their correct answers in B.
- Ask Ss to read the question and answers once or twice. Then match them.
- Ask Ss to work in pair and role-play the question and answers.
- Ask some pairs to complete the self-assessment. Identify any difficulties/ weak areas and provide further practice as needed.
D. Project.
1. Read the passage about the game "Blind man's bluff"
- T guides Ss to play this game.
- Explain new words and anything difficult for Ss. Make sure they understand everything throughly.
New words:
- blindfold : ng??i b? b?t m?t
- touch (v): ??ng, ch?m
- hint: g?i nh?
- Let Ss work in groups to play game.


1. Find one odd word or phrase in each line.
- Find the words individually and then share their answer with their partners


Key:
1.C 2.A 3.D 4.C 5.B
2. Read the four words in each line. Write the name of the game or sport the four words belong to.
- Repeat the words .
- Write the answers in the notebooks.
Key:
1. cycling 2. Football
3. boxing 4. Table tennis
5. basketball

3. Put the verbs in the brackets in the correct form.
- Supply the correct form of the verbs in the brackets
Key:
1. are 2. Took 3. Started
4. are playing 5. Did you do- cycled - watched
4. What did you say in these situations ?
Ss do the task separately:
Key:
1. Please stop making noise.
2. Go out to play with your friends.
3. Don't feed the animals.
4. Stand in line, boys!
5. Don't tease the dog.
5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish the pasage.
- Do the task individually. Check the answers with their partners before discussing.
- Read the whole passage.
1. play 2. Hear 3. Games
4. sports 5. famous

6. Match the questions in A with their correct answers in B.
- Read the question and answers once or twice. Then match them.
- Work in pair and role-play the question and answers.
Key:
1-a 2-e 3-b 4-c 5- d


1. Read the passage about the game "Blind man's bluff"
- Listen to the teacher.
- Work in groups to play a game.






- Do as directed.
III. HOMEWORK.
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started - U9

- Listen to the teacher.
- Prepare Getting started - Unit 8

































Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:4/2/2015
PERIOD 71

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 1 : Getting started ( WHAT NICE PHOTOS)
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss name some continents,countries,cities and lanmarks in English such as: north and sound america,europe...
- Understand the content of the dialogue between Mai and Tom and do excercises well.
- Ss can talk sth about continents,countries,cities and lanmarks.
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES :

4.Consolidation(3'):
- What have you learnt today?
- What's the difference between continent , a country, a city ,?.?
5. Homework(2'):
- Asks sts to learn Voc by heart.
- Do ex A in workbook .


































Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:9/2/2015
PERIOD 72
UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 2 : A CLOSER LOOK 1
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warm-up: Kim's game (5')
- Devide the class into 2 teams
- Show the adjectives on the screen in 30 seconds and asks ss to remember
- Which team remembers more words will be the winner.
Eleciting:
I. Vocabulary: (10')
1. Match the words in A with their opposite in B. Some words may have more than one opposite.
- Ask Ss to match the words they know in pairs.
- point out that some adj in the left column can have more than one opposites in the right column.
- Give feedback.
- Have Ss practice reading the adj.
2. Create word webs
- Have Ss work in groups
- Tell them they can use the words in 1.
- Encourage ss to add other adj.
- Give feedback. Point out that some adj can't go with particular nouns

II. Pronunciation (10')
3. Listen and write the words you hear in the appropriate column. Then, read the words aloud.
- Practice the Sound / ?u / and /ai / together. Model the two sounds with cold and sky.
- Let ss see how the sounds are formed.
- Ask Ss to give words that have these two sounds. Play the recording and ask Ss to listen and fill in the suitable column. Play the recording as many times as necessary.
- Give feedback and have ss repeat the sounds as a class.
4. Listen and repeat.
- Have Ss practice reading in bold first.
- Ask them to say if the word has an / ?u / or /ai / sound.
- Have ss repeat the sentences.
- Providing further practice by dividing the class into two groups. Have groups read alternate lines.
III. Grammar ( 15')
Superlatives of long adjectives
5. Complete the fact sheet by choosing one picture...
- Let ss have a quick look at all the pictures. Ask ss to work individually to complete the fact sheet, using one of the pictures provided.
- Have Ss work in pairs compare the answers. Ask them to discuss whether they agree with each other's answers.
6. Read this article about Britain.
- Ask Ss to look at their earlier answers in ex 5 to check if they are similar to what the text says.
- Have Ss ask and answer questions about the fact using most + adj
7. Consolidation (3')
? How to make the sounds / ?u / and /ai /
? Find some more words that have these two sounds
.V. Homework (2')
? Learn by heart all the new words.
? Do exercises in workbook - E6
? Prepare: A Closer Look 2.


Adj:
Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean, historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe, dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot, modern, expensive, noisy.



Key:
Old- new, dangerous - safe, quiet - noisy, dry - wet, boring- exciting, clean - dirty, historic - modern, cheap - expensive, cold - hot.




Key:
City: beautiful, peaceful, exciting, modern, big, polutted, safe
People: nice, friendly, unfriendly, open, noisy, interesting
Food: delicious, awful, good, tasty
Weather: bad, rainy, hot, cold, wet
Building: old, modern, tall, new


/ ?u / : cold, snow, old, clothes, hold
/ai /: sky, exciting, high, fine, flight


















Key:
1. London
2. Oxford uni.
3. Shakespeare
4. fish and chips
5. tea
6. watching tv
































Making date: 1/2/2015
Teaching date:10/2/2015
PERIOD 73
UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 3 : A CLOSER LOOK 2
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warmer (5'): Slap the board
- Elicit some words form Ss
- Teacher divides the class into two teams.
? Go to the board, listen to the teacher and slap on the correct words.
- Teacher gets feedback
-> Today we are going to learn about school activities and subjects.

- Old, dangerous, quiet, dry, clean, historic, boring, cheap, cold, safe, dirty, wet, polluted, new, exciting, hot, modern, expensive, noisy.

- Work in groups

I. Presentation (15')
Grammar: The present perfect
- Ask Ss to recall what Tom tol Mai about in the conversation in getting started
- Ss underline all the verbs in the present perfect tense.
- Use grammar box to explain that pp is used to show that one has had or has never had this experience.
- Provide the form of the pp.
S + have/ has + past participate
- Play 'board race' game: write two lists of verbs on the board. Two teams will race to the board to write the pp of these verbs. Each team gets one pointfor the correct participate. The teams finishes first gets 2 extra points

- underline all the verbs in the present perfect tense.
- Play 'board race' game
II. Practice (25')
1. Put the verbs in the brackets into the pp
- Tell Ss that some information for this exerciseis notmentioned directly in the recording - it must be inferred.
_ Have ss do the task and ask them to support their answers with parts in the recording.
2. Put the verbs in the brackets in the correct form
- Have Ss work on this exercise individually before they compare answers with each other.
- Give feedback as a class discussion.
3. Look at Tom webpage. Tell a partner which he has done this week.
- Elicit what there is in the photos by asking ss questions
- Ask ss to provide the verbs and their pp
- Have Ss write the sentences in full in their notebooks, then in pairs take turns talking about what Tom has done this week.
III. Production (5')
Class survey
- Make sure Ss can move around and ask different classmates for different questions.
- ss shouldn't ask the same person all the questions.
- When they have finished the survey, make a class poll by asking ss to report the results.
- Count the number os 'yes' answers to each question and find out what is the thing the most ss have ever done, and the thing that the least of them/ or no one has done.
Home work.
- Learn the grammar and do exercise 6 in the textbook. Prepare the new lesson.





Work individually
- Key:
1. has been 2. has been
3. has visited 4. has been
5. hasn't been

Key:
1. Have you seen... I have seen
2. go 3. have never been
4. clean 5. takes 6. has eaten
Key:
1. He has read a book.
2. He has eaten "pho'.
3. Her has played football.
4. He has got an A+.
5. He has washed his dog.



- move around and ask the questions in the survey


Period 80 : Test 3
I. M?c ?ch yu c?u:
Ki?m tra ki?n th?c hs ??t ???c trong qu trinh h?c, ??c bi?t l cc ki?n th?c c trong cc unit 7, 8, 9.
1. ??c hi?u :
??c ?o?n v?n l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng sai, tr? l?i cu h?i d?a vo n?i dung bi h?c.
2. Vi?t:
Bi?t s? d?ng c?u trc v ng? php s?p x?p cc t? ? cho thnh cu hon ch?nh.
3. Ki?n th?c ngn ng? :
Bi?t phn bi?t cch pht m c?a t?, s? d?ng ki?n th?c ng? php ? h?c ?? chia ??ng t? v l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng.
II. Chu?n b? :
Bi photo.
III. Ma tr?n :




C?p??
t? duy




Ch? ??

Nh?n
bi?t
Thng
hi?u
V?n
d?ng
T?ng


TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL

Language
Pho


4
1.0



4
1.0
focus
Vocab
6
3.0





6
3.0

Gram



8
2.0


8
2.0
Reading




4
2.0


4
2.0
Writing






4
2.0
4
2.0
T?ng

6


3.0
16


5.0

4
2.0
26
10.

IV. ?? bi :
I. PH?N TR?C NGHI?M:
Question 1: Odd one out. Which underlined sound is pnonounced differently in each group? ( 1 point )
A. idea B. aerobics C. fair D.pair
A. this B. there C. than D. thank
A. worked B. needed C. wanted D. rented
A. cold B. long C. snow D. hold
Question 2: Choose and circle the best answerA, B, C or D ( 3points )
1. The food is very ???..
A. long B. delicious C. noisy D. historic
2. Where do you ??. fishing ?
A. play B. do C.go D. have
3. Who is the most popular British writer in the world ?
A. Dickens B. William Shakespeare C. Hemingway D. To Hoai
4. Hai can ??? boxing well.
A. do B. play C. go D. have
5. The ??.. tells people what is happening in Viet Nam and the rest of the world.
A. national B. cartoon C. game show D. 7 o'clock news
6. Big Ben is the most famous tower in ?..
A. Viet Nam B. England C. America D. Australia
II. PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: Give the correct form of the following verbs.( 2points )
1. He ( not go ) out last night, he ( stay ) at home.
2. Lan ( learn ) English for 2 years ?
- No, he ( learn ) for 3 years.
3. you ( wear ) uniform yesterday ?
No. I ( not wear ) yesterday.
4. your mother ( read ) book every night ?
- No, she ( watch ) TV.
Question 2: Read the following passage and answer the questions ( 2.0 points)
Australia is a island continent in the South Pacific. The capital is Canberra, but the city with the biggest population is Sydney, which has nearly four million. English is the first language of most people, but there are also immigrants who speak other languages.
1. Where is Australia?

2. Is Canberra the capital of Australia?

3. What is the population of Sydney?
.
4. Do Australian people only speak English?
.
Question 3: Rearrange the words to complete the sentences. ( 6B-2.0 points; 6A-1point)
1, lives / street / grandparents / he / Hoang Quoc Viet / his / on / with.
?????????????????????????????????.
2, tallest / my / is / the / family / in / brother/ person / my.
?????????????????????????????????.
3, lives / very / from / he / far / office / his.
?????????????????????????????????.
4. did/ Who/ play/ with/ you/ badminton/ yesterday?
????????????????????????????????....
Question 4 ( 6A ). Rewrite te following sentences ( 1.0 points)
1. No river in the world is as long as The Nile river
-> The Nile river ?????????????????.???????????????????
2. Nam is taller than Ba
-> Ba ?????????????????????????????????..??.??????
3.Nam is interested in watching televison
-> Nam likes ??????????????????????????????????????
4. There isn't any sugar in the coffee.
-> The coffee?????????????????????????????????????..


?p n v thang ?i?m ch?m:

A- PH?N TR?C NGHI?M:
Question 1: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25 ?i?m
1A 2D 3A 4B
Question 2: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,5 ?i?m
1B 2C 3B 4A 5D 6B

B- PH?N T? LU?N:
Question 1: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25 ?i?m
1. didn't go - stayed
2. Has Lan learnt - has learnt
3. Did you wear - hasn't worn
4. Does your mother read - watches
Question 2: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,5 ?i?m
1. It's in the South Pacific
2. Yes, it is
3. It has nearly four million
4. No, they don't.
Question 3: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,5 ?i?m-6B, 0,25? - 6A
1. He lives with his grandparents on Hoang Quoc Viet Street.
2. My brother is the tallest person in my family.
3. He lives very far from his office.
4. Who did you play badminton with yesterday ?
Question 4: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25 ?i?m
1. The Nile river is the longest river in the world
2. Ba is shorter than Nam
3. Nam likes watching TV
4. The coffee hasn't any sugar



















UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 4 : COMMUNICATION
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warmer (5'): Hang man
- Cue: +What do you want to do first when you go to a new school?
+ 8 letters
- Ask Ss to guess the letters one by one and draw a line if they have each wrong answer
-> Today we are going to learn how to describe cities and landmarks
I. Pre- speaking (15')
1. Teaching vocab
- Teacher use different techniques to teach vocab (situation, reality)
- Follow the five steps of teaching vocab.




* Checking vocab: Magic wheel
2. Activity
- Show the pitures of the five landmarks and ask ss what they are.
- If they don't know their English name, give the English names and ask ss to match them with the photos.
- Elicit from ss any information they know about the landmarks:
Which countries and which cities are they in ?
What type of building are they?
What were they built for?....
II.While - speaking (20')
1. Exercise 2
- Have ss read the five texts about the five landmarks. Set a time limit
- Have them do the matching and ask them to support their answers
2. Exercise 3
- Ask Ss to read the text again and allow them a longer time limit
- Ask them to underline key words in each text.
- Explain that key words are important words that help us understand and remember the main points of the text.
- Have ss do the T/F exercise individually, then compare the answers with their friends before discussing them as a class.
- Ask ss to support their answers
III. Post- speaking (5')
- Choose a country/ city/ landmark yourself.
- Ask the class to guess what it is.
- Arrange groups of four to play the game.
- Each group then chooses the most difficult city that they had to guess in their group and presents it to the whole class as a challenge.
. Home work.
- Summarize the main points of the lesson.
- Guess each letter "LANDMARK"







- design (v):
- symbol (n):
- landmark (n):
- creature (n):
- heritage (n):

- Repeat in chorus and individually
- Copy all the words
- Listen and answer
- work individually
Key:
a. Merlion b. Big ben
c. Temple of literature
d. Sydney opere House\
e. Eiffel Tower


Key:
1. Big Ben
2. Sydney opere House
3. Temple of literature
4. Eiffel Tower
5. Merlion






KEY:

1. F
2. F
3. T
4. F
5. F
6. F


- Work in groups of four



Week : 26
Preparing date: 17/2/2014
Period : 75
Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 5: SKILL 1
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
- Read for specific and general information in texts, including postcards.
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warm-Up (5')
- Show The Class Some Real Postcards.
- Ask Ss Where The Postcards Were Sent From.
- Ask Them To Guess Who Wrote The Postcard And To Whom, Where Was It Written, What Was It Written About...
I. Pre - Reading (10):
1. Look At The Postcards
- Discuss The Featutes Of The Postcards With Ss: Photo On One Side, Short Text On The Other Side, Can Be Sent Without Envelope,...
- Draw Ss'attention To The Postcard. Ask Them The Three Questions. Accept Reasonable Answers.


Ii. While - Reading (20')
1. Read The Postcard And Answer The Questions.
- Have Ss Look At The Questions First.
- Ask Them To Underline The Key Words In The Questions. Tell Them These Key Words Will Help Them To Find The Information More Easily In The Text.
- Have Them Read The Postcard And Answer The Questions Individually Then Compare The Answers With Each Other Before Discussing Them As A Class.
- Encourage Ss To Support Their Answers, Especially Numbers 6 And 8.
2. Match The Headings With The Numbers.
- Have Ss Read The Text Again, This Time To Match The Headings.
- Then Call Their Attention To How A Postcard Is Organized.
III. Post- Reading (10')
- Ss can choose one of the cities they have learnt about in this unit, or choose a city that they like in Vietnam.
- Ask ss to imagine they have just arrived in that cityand want to tell others about it.
- Ask them to work individually answering the questions in the form of notes, but not in full sentences.
- Using notes, have ss work in pairs and tell each other about the city they choose. Make sure they speak in full sentences now. Then have them join another pair to make groups of four and continue their discussions.
Homework:
- Ask Ss to summarize the main point of the lesson and prepare skills 2.

- Answer The Questions





Key:
1. The Photo Is Of Stockholm, Sweden
2. The Sender Writes About His/ Her Stay In The City.
3. We Sent Postcards To Tell Our Family And Friends That We Are Having A Good Time, But We Still Miss Them And Want To Send Some Photos Of The Place Where We Are So That, Although They Cannot Bewith Us There They Can Still See How Beautiful It Is.
Key:
1. Mai Is In Stockholm.
2. She Is There With Her Family.
3. The Weather Has Been Perfect. It Is Sunny.
4. Mai is staying in a holtel.
5. She has invited the Royal Palace and had 'fika' in a cafe in the Old town.
6. Fika means a leisure break when one drinks tea/ coffee and perhaps has some biscuits with friends and family
7. She will cycle to discover the city.
8. Mai is feeling happy. She used the words such as " fantastic, perfect, amazing, too beautiful for words"
Key:
1. i 2. c 3. h 4.b
5. d 6. g 7. f 8. e 9. a




- Follow T's instruction



Week : 27
Preparing date: 20/2/2014
Period : 76
Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 6: SKILL 2
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
- Listen for specific details including facts and figures
- Write a holiday postcard
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- St: Textbook, sts' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
Warmer (5'): Whisper To A Yell
- Divide The Class Into 2 Groups
- Whisper The Words One By One To Two Ss From Two Groups
- The Two Ss Whisper To The Others, The Last One Will Yell The Word
- Which Team Yells The Word First And Correctly Will Have One Point.
- The Team Has More Point Will Be The Winner
I. Listening (15')
1. Pre- Listening: Look At The Pictures. What Do You See?
- Ask Ss What They See In The Photos First.
- Ask Ss If They Know About Nobel Prize.
- Tell Ss They Will Listen About The Old Town In Stockholm, And How Nobel Prizes Are Awarded Every Year In Stockholm.
2. While - Listening
2.1: Listen And Write T Or F
- Before Listening To The Recording, Go Through The Statements With Ss. Explain Any New Words.
- Ask Ss To Underline The Most Important Information In Each Sentence.
- Tell Ss They Need To Listen For The Main Ideas They Hear. Play The Recording As Many Time As Ss Wish.
2.2: Listen Again To The Talk And Fill In The Gaps
- Expalin To Ss That This Time They Need To Listen For The Exact Details In The Recording.
- Ask Them To Identify The Kind Of Information They Have To Find Out: Years, Amount Of Money, Number Of People, Date, Etc.
- Play The Recording For Ss To Fill In The Gaps.
3. Post- Listening
- Ask Ss To Work In Groups Of Four To Summarize The Recording They Heard.
- Call Some Ss To Talk In Front Of The Class.
II. Writing: A holiday postcard (20')
1. Pre- Writing
- Write 5 Ws And 1 H On The Board And Ask Ss To Give Examples.
- Draw Their Attention To The Postcard In 2 Page 28. Ask Ss How The 5 Ws And 1 H Are Answered In The Postcard.
- Have them make the questions in full and find the information from the postcard that gives the answers
2. While - writing
2.1 Rearrange the words to make sentences
- Explain to ss that the space for writing on postcards is not big so people often write short sentences which contain the most important information, and which can express what they are feeling.
- Have ss rearrange the exclamations
2.2 Write a postcard
- Ask ss to use the notes they have made in speaking 4 page 28 to write a postcard to their family orfriends.
- Remind them how the 5ws and 1h are included in the notes
3. Post- writing
- Pair ss and ask them to write postcards to each other.
- Have them swap and give feedback on each other's writing once they have finished.
HOMEWORK (5')
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Assign home work.
Words:
1. Royal Palace
2. Nobel Prize
3. museum
4. cafes
5. restaurants
6. islands













Key:
1. T
2. F
3. F
4. F
5. F



Key:
1. 14
2. 700
3. 3,000
4. 10 December
5. 10 million






- work in groups of four to summarize the recording















Key:
1. Stockholm ids fantastic
2. We're in Da Lat!
3. We're having a good time here!
4. I love Disneyland!
5. You must come!
6. I wish you were here!



- Write a postcard






- Write and discuss with their friends


Week : 27
Preparing date: 22/2/2014
Period : 77
Teaching date:

UNIT 9. CITIES OF THE WORLD
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
- Ss use the lexical items related to the topic 'Cities of the world"
- Ss use the vocabulary and structures to describe cities and landmarks
+ Pronunciation: Sound / ?u / and /ai /
+ Grammar: The present perfect tense, superlatives of long adjs
2. Skill : reading, listening and speaking.
3. Attitude: Sts understand about cities of the world.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. Warm-up: (5') Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up)
- Divide the class into 2 groups
- Each group in turn chooses one number and answers the question
- With each right answer, they will have one point. If they choose 'lucky number' they will have one point without answering the question.
- Which group has more points will win the game
B. NEW LESSON. (35')
* Set the sence: You have revised vocabulary related to the topic " cities of the words" , now we will revise the present perfect
Exercise 2: Put the verbs in the prackets into the present perfect.
- Ask ss to complete the conversation individually, then share answers with a parner.
Exercise 3: In pairs, complete this fact sheet about Vietnam
- Go through questions with ss. if they don't have any information about a particular question, stop and give at least 3 answer option for them to consider.
- After they have completed the fact sheet , have a whole class discussion about the answers, as there could be several correct answers.



Exercise 4: Write a short paragrap
- tell ss for a reference they can look at the text about Britain on page 25 in Ss' book
COMMUNICATION
- Try the first ' Have you ever..?' question on page 26 in s's book with 2 ss as an example.
- Ask the class who they think told the truth, who didn't, and why they think so.
- Have ss play the game in pair
- Ask some pairs to report what they have found out about their partner.
Finished!
- Ask ss to use their results for the questions in looking back to guide them as they complete this self- assessment.
- Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
HOMEWORK. (5')
- Summarize the main point of the lesson.
- Ask Ss to Prepare Getting started - U10

Key;
1. a,b
2. a,c
3. a,c
4. a,b
5. b,c










Key:
1. have you ever eaten
2. have you eaten
3. have been
4. have been
5. have you visited
6. have seen

Key: (suggested)
Oldest university: Quoc Tu Giam, Thang Long- Hanoi (1076)
Most popular Vietnamese writer: Nguyen Du, Nam Cao
Most popular food: spring rolls, noodles
Most popular drink: tea, coffee
Most common activity: watching tv, football


- Write a short paragrap about Vietnam



- Play the game in pairs and report


















Week : 27
Preparing date: 22/2/2014
Period : 78 + 79
Teaching date:


REVIEW 3 (UNIT 7-8-9)
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:at the end of this lesson Ss can review all the knowledge what they have learnt in units 7-9
2. Skill : reading, writing, listening and speaking.
II.PREPARATION.
- T: Textbook, poster
- Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:
Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. Warm-up: (5') Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up)
- Divide the class into 2 groups
- Each group in turn chooses one number and answers the question
- With each right answer, they will have one point. If they choose 'lucky number' they will have one point without answering the question.
- Which group has more points will win the game
B. New lesson
I. Language
1. Pnonunciation
Ex2: Practise saying the sentences. Pay attention to the pronunciation of the underlined words.
- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen carefully.
- Play the recording again and ask them to repeat the sentences.
- T checks on their pronunciation of the key sounds.
2. Vocabulary
Ex3: Choose A, B or C to fill the gaps in the passage.
- Ss do separately and share their answers later with a partner.
- Check Ss' answer.
Ex4: Choose one of the words/ phrases in the box to complete sentences 1-6.
- Ask ss to look at the whole sentence to decide what kind of word is missing before referring to the list of words given.

3. GRAMMAR
Ex5: Complete the sentences with the present simple, pp or past simple form of the verbs in brackets.
- This is a chance for ss to look back at the use of the verb tenses. Focus on the difference between the p.s and p.p
Ex 6: Are the underlined question words correct? If not, correct them.
- Ss must by now be familiar with, and quite skillful in, using question words. If the question word is wrong, ask ss to explain why.
Ex7: Use the superlatives in the box to complete the sentences.
- This look back at the use of superlatives with long adjectives. Check Ss' answers.
4. Everyday English
Ex8: Choose the best replies for the questions.
- This create a situation in which one can use the language already learnt, in daily conversation.
II. SKILLS
Reading
Ex1+2:
- Ss do this exercise individually, and then check it with their peers.
- Let ss discuss among themselves before finalizing the answers.
Speaking
Ex3: Work in groups. Interview your friends about their likes. Takes notes in the table and report it to your class?
- This, again, revises the language items learnt but in a more dynamic form: interviewing and reporting the results
Listening
Ex4: Listen to the interview with Nick and fill in the blanks.
- This listening aims at revision of present oerfect tense. Play the recording and let ss write down the answers.
Ex5: Listen to an interview with Phong and complete the answers with information from the listening.
- This listening requires ss to listen more attentively for specific information.
- Ask ss to read the questions first and determine what information is needed for the answer
- Then, T plays the recording.
Writing
6. Mark and Tim visited India last summer. Look at the information in the table to write a complete passage about their visit
- Ask ss to read the table and decide what tense/ sentence structure to use for the writing and how the information is organized. Only then should T let ss write.
- Ss might want to change some details from the table. Encourage them to do so.
They can start with:
Last summer, Tim and mark visited india. They.....

Key:
1. C
2. A
3. A
4. B
5. D
6. D
















Key: 1.A 2. B 3.A 4.A 5.C





Key:
1. Paris 2. Football
3. Local Television
4. Country 5. Remote Control
6. Summer Sports

Key:
1. started 2. play
3. had 4. is
5. bought 6. has worked

Key:
1. What 2. When
3. Cotrrect 4. How tall
5. Correct


Key:
1. the most expensive
2. the most popular
3. the most interesting
4. the most colourful
5. the most dangerous
Key:
1.e 2.a 3.c 4.b 5.d



Key:
Ex1: 1.B 2. A
Ex2:
1. Who's faster
2. putting your toes together
3. Who's faster
4. Putting your toes together







Key:
1. competition
2. skiing
3. country
4. canada
5. cartoon

Key:
1. running race
2. Thailand
3. Wait and see
UNIT 7: Television
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use the lexical items related to televosion.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
IV.New lesson.

Sts' and T's activities
Contents
1. Warm up
- T writes the word " Television" on board and asks Ss to give any ideas/ vocabulary they know relating to the topics.

2. Presentation
- Pre teach some new words.
- Set the scence: What are you expecting to hear. Ask ss: What will they talk about?
- Getting started.



3. Practice
a- Ss work individually. Allow them to share their answers with their partners before discussing as a class.
b- This task focuses on the use of adjectives to describe the programme. Let Ss look for the adjectives from the conversation.
c- Supplement the list of adjectives with words drawn from Ss experiences.








4. Further practice
Ex2: Ask Ss to do the matching
- Go round and check if they match the pictures and the words correctly.
- Show Ss how to pronounce each word by saying it and ask Ss to repeat.



Ex3: Ss have to read the sentences carefully and decide which word is the right one. T can guide them to some clues like " It makes me laugh" " Disney?







Ex4: eg: There are not enough programmes for children or I can watch many films?

5. Homework.
- Learn new words by heart
- Do exercise 1,2 in work book
- Prepare: A closer look 1


- I can watch many cartoons on it.
- It helps to cheer me up?
1. Vocabulary.
- favourite programme:
- channel:
- funny:
- schedule:
2. Getting started.
What's on today?
a. Read the conversation again and answer the questions.
Key:
1. Laughing out Loud.
2. VTV3.
3. No, they aren't.
4. Because he is awful.
5. Tom is stupid, but funny
b. Find the adjectives describing each character in the conversation and write them here.
Key: Mr. Bean : funny, awful
Tom: stupid, funny
Jerry: intelligent.
c. Which adjective(s) below can you use to describe a TV programme you have watched? What programme is it?
Possible answers:
Yes: popular, historical, serious, long, educational, boring, funny, good, entertaining, live.
No: beautiful, small
3. Practice
-Ex2: Put the correct word in the box under each picture.
Key:
1. national television
2. news programme
3. local television
4. comedy
5. game show
6. animal programme
Ex3: Use suitable words to complete the sentences.
Key: 1. national
2. comedy
3. channels
4. competition
5. Cartoons.
6. educational
Ex4:Write down two things you like about television and two things you don't like about it.
eg: There are not enough programmes for children or I can watch many films?

* Adjustment:
????????????????????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????????????????
????????????????????????????????????????????????????



Date of planning: 1/1/2014
Date of teaching: 7/ 1/ 2014

Period 58 UNIT 7: Television
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce the sound /?/, // correctly in isolation and in context . Use the lexical items related to television.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.

Sts' and T's activities
Contents
1. Warm up
Chatting: Which is your favourite TV programme?
Which MC do you like best?

2. Presentation
- Teach vocabulary
Ex1. Ask Ss to work in group of three.
When Ss completed their work, T play the recording to check their answers as well as to practise the pronunciation of the new words.





3. Practice
Ex2: Revise the vocabulary learnt in both Getting started and Activity 1. Ss learn to identify a word from its description.
Ex3: Ss can refer to 2 and the suggestd structures in 3 to see how a word is defined. T writes some prompts on the board so that Ss can imitate.
Eg: In this programme, people?
A person who?.







4. Further practice.
Ask Ss to practise the sounds /?/, //
Ex4: Ask Ss to listen carefully to the words
T talks about the differences between two sounds.
Ex5: Ask Ss to write the words in the two appropriate boxes. Check if they do it correctly.
Ex6: Tongue Twisters
Allow Ss to practise reading the tongue twisters among themseves.
5. Homework.
- Learn vacabulary by heart
- Do exercise in work book
- Prepare: A closer look 2





1. Vocabulary
Ex1: Write the words/ phrases in the box under the pictures.
Key:
1. newsreader
2. TV schedule
3. MC
4. viewer
5. remote control
6. weatherman

Ex2: Choose a word from the box for each description below.
Key:
1. Weatherman
2. newreader
3. remote control
4. MC
5. volume button
6. TV viewer.

EX3: Game
1. Newreader: A person who reads news.
2. weatherman: a man who gives a weather forecast.
3. comedian: a person whose job is to make people laugh by telling jokes and funny stories.

2. Pronunciation
Ex4: Listen and repeat words.

Ex5: Which words in Ex4 have /?/and which have //. Listen again and write them in the correct column.
/?/
//
theater
Thanksgiving
earth
anything
both
through
there
them
neither
weatherman
than
feather
Ex6: Tongue Twisters
The thirty- three thieves are thinking of how to get through the security


* Adjustment:
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????
????????????????????????????.????????????????????????










Date of planning: 14/1/2014
Date of teaching: 21/1/2014
Period 64
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 1: Getting started
A. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to the lexical items related to the topic "sports and games" and use the combinations: go, play, do + N/Ving.
- Vocabulary: lexical items related to sports and games.
- Go, play, do + N/Ving
II. Preparation:
- Pictures, worksheets, a CD & a cassette player.
III. Procedures:
A. Organization
- Checking attendance
B. New lesson

Students and teacher's activities
Content
1. Warm up
* Chatting:
? What do you do in your free time?
? Do you play sports?
? What sports do you do?
? How often do you do it?
T leads Ss to the lesson.
2. Presentation







I. Vocabulary.
- Teacher use different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia, examples?..)
- Follow the seven steps of teaching vacab.



* Checking vocab: Rub-out and remember.
- Copy all the words
T: lets ss listen and repeat the words in activity 2

Do boxing: t?p quy?n anh
Do aerobics: t?p e- r- bic
Do karate: t?p ka- ra- te
Play chess: ch?i c? vua
Play table tennis: ch?i bng bn
Play volleyball: ch?i bng chuy?n
Go skiing: ?i tr??t tuy?t
Go cycling: ?i ??p xe
Outdoor (adj): ngoi tr?i
Outdoors (adv), (n): khu v?c bn ngoi
Breaktime (n): ngh? gi?i lao
3. Practice
T: lets ss name the sports and games in Activity 3 individually first, then compare their answer with a parter




II. Practice
Activity 3:
1. cycling
2. table tennis
3. running
4. swimming
5. chess
6. skiing
T: explains the difference between " a sport" and "a game".
A sport: an activity that you do for pleasure and that need physical exercise.
A game: an activty or sport with rules in which people or team compete against each other.

T: shows the picture in activity 1.
? Who do you see in the picture?
? Where are they?
? What do you think they are talking about?
T: lets ss listen one time to answer the followning questions:
? What sports can Duong do?
? Is Mai good at sports?
Ss: Duong can do karate and play table tennis.
No, she isn't.
T: asks ss roleplay the dialogue then calls 2 pairs to perform it.
T: lets ss play the game Lucky Number to answer the questions 1.a






T: allows ss to discuss in groups to find the meanings of the expression in 1.b in the conversation.



T: lets ss practice the sample dialogue in 1.c then asks them to make a similar conversation.
Activity 1
a. 1. Duong can play table tennis and do karate.
2. Mai is going to learn karate.
3. Because the equipment there is modern and the people are friendly.
4. Duong played with Duy and won(for the first time)
5. At the Karate club.
b. 1. Wow: used to express surprise.
2. Congratulations: used to congratulate sb/ to tell that you are please about their success.
3. Great: use to show admiration
4. See you: used when you say goodbye.
4. Production.
T: asks ss to do the activity 4 in pairs in 3 minutes

T: lets ss do activity 5 individually in 3 minutes

T: asks ss to conduct a survey (ask 2 friends to complete the survey then report the survey and give comment on how sporty your friend is.)
Activity 4
Play: chess, table tennis, volley
Do:boxing, aerobics, karate
Go: fishing, cycling, swimming, running, skiing
Activity 5:
1. do
2. is watching
3. goes
4. likes
5. played
Questions
Answers
ss's answer
ss's answer
1. Can you swim?
A. Yes
B. No


2. Do you play outdoors everyday?
A. Yes
B. No


3. Do you get up early and do morning exercise?
A. Yes
B. No


4. What do you do at breaktime at school?
A. Play in the school yard.
B. Sit in the classroom.


5. What do you think of sports/ games?
A. very good/ useful
A. A waste of time.



5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words.
Do Ex in workbook
Prepare for: A Closer Look 1


* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
***********************************************************************************

Date of planning: 12/1/2013
Date of teaching: 22/1/2013

Period: 65
UNIT 8: SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1

I. Objectives:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to pronounce correct the sounds /e?/ and /??/ correctly in isolation and in context; and enrich their vocabulary related to sports items.
- Develop listening skill, reading skill and pronunciation.
- Vocabulary: sports items
- Pronunciation: /e?/ and /??/
II. Preparation:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, a CD & a cassette player
III. Procedures:

Sts' and T's activities
Content
1. Warm- up
* Bingo:
T: asks ss to write 6 words about sports or games.
T: reads: tennis, table tennis, soccer, football, volleyball, running, fishing, cycling, skiing, karate, swimming, chess, aerobics, skipping ropes, badminton?
T: leads in the lesson







I. Vocabulary.
2. Presentation
. Teaching vocab
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)



* Checking vocab: write the words under the picture Activity 2
Sports shoes
(n)
Giy th? thao
Boat
(n)
Thuy?n
Skateboard
(n)
Vn tr??t
Goggles
(n)
Knh b?i, knh
b?o h?
Racket
(n)
V?t c?u lng
Skis
(n)
Vn tr??t tuy?t
Racquet
(n)
V?t bng bn,
tennis


II. Practice
Activity 2
1. A bicycle 2. A ball
3. Sports shoes 4. Skis
5. A boat 6. A racket
7. A skateboard 8. Goggles
3. Practice
T: tells ss to do the task independently first. Calls some ss to write their answers on the board, then check their answers as a class.
Activity 3
1. c 4. e 7. b
2. d 5. g 8. f
3. a 6. h
T: explains how to form the sounds /e?/ and /??/ together. Asks ss to observe teacher for the correct pronunciation of the two sounds.
T: plays the CD 3 times and lets ss listen and reapeat. Calls some ss to read aloud.

T: allows ss to do act 5 individually in 4 mins.
Calls 2 ss to write their answers on the board.
T: checks their answers as a class through the game: Tasks the ss to touch their ear if they hear /??/ sound, touch their hair if they hear /e?/ sound, stay still if they don't hear these two sounds while teacher is saying the word aloud.
Activity 5
1. A 2. C
3. B 4. A
5. B
6. A
4. Production
*Game: Ping Pong
T: devides the class into 2 teams. Team 1 thinks of the words with /e?/ sound. Team 2 thinks of the words with /??/ sound. One member of team 1 says aloud a word with /e?/ sound. Immediately another member in team 2 says aloud a word with /??/ sound.

5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words.
Do Ex A1,2 P10, B1,2 ,3 P10,11 (SBT)
Prepare for next ; Closer Look 2



* Adjustment:
???????????????????????????????????.
???????????????????????????????????.
???????????????????????????????????.

*************************************************



Date of planning: 3 /2 /2014
Date of teaching: 10/ 2 /2014

Period 66
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Use the past simple; and imperatives to tell sb to do sth
- Grammar: - Past simple tense
- Imperative
II. Preparation:
- Visual aids: pictures.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
III. Procedures:
Sts and T's activities
Content
1. Warm- up
* Question and answer:
? What did you do last Sunday?
T: leads in the past simple tense.


2. Presentation
Teaching grammar.
T: writes the teacher's question in warm-up stage ans some Ss'answers on the board.

T: asks to look at the examples to draw the rules, the usage, and the form.

I. Grammar:
1. The past simple tense
a. Examples
A: What did you do last Sunday?
B: I stayed at home. I did my homework..
b. Usage:
We use the past simple tense to talk about a finished action in the past. We often say when it happened.
c. Form (Textbook)
Iregular verbs:
Be- was/ were Have- had
Win- won Eat- ate
Go- went Do- did
d. Notes
Adverbs of time are used with the past simple are: yesterday, 2 weeks/ 3 months? ago, last week/ month/ year/ Sunday?., in 2012/ 2011?
T: reminds ss of some imperative sentences normally used in the class.
T: lets look at the examples to draw the usage the form.



3. Practice
T: lets ss work in pairs to give the answers for Activity 1. Teacher observes, helps when necessary and correct ss' mistakes.
T: lets ss do Activity 2 individually. Teacher calls on 2 students to write their answer on the board. Teacher corrects their answers and gives explanation if necessary.

T: calls 2 pairs to read the dialogue with the correct verb forms.
T: lets ss do Activity 4 individually then allows them to compare their answers with their friends.

T: asks ss to work in groups of 4, take turns telling their friends what to do or not to do at the gym. (Activity 5)

2. Imperatives
We use imperative to tell someone to do something or to give a direct order.
Eg: Sit down (please).
Open your books.
Don't be late for school.
II. Practice
Activity 1:
1. were 2. was
3. was/ did/ was 4. Did/ were/ did/ was
Activity 2:
1. was 6. had
2. didn't do 7. did
3. sat 8. visited
4. watched 9. ate
5. went 10. scored
Activity 4:
1. Take your umbrella
2. Please don't litter. 3. Please hurry up.
4. Don't train too hard. 5. Put on your coat.
Activity 5:
Suggested answers:
Pay your fee first.
Put on your trainers/ sports shoes.
Listen to the instructor carefully.
Don't litter.
Don't eat or drink at the gym.
4. Production
T: lets ss work in pairs asking and answering about their last weekend. Calls some ss to report their answers.

5. Homework
Do B4 P11, E1 P15 (SBT)
Prepare: Communication


* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************


Date of planning: 4 / 2 /2014
Date of teaching: 11 / 2 /2014

Period 67
UNIT 8 : SPORTS AND GAMES
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:
- Enrich their background knowledge about sports through a sports quiz, students can also talk about their sports activities and talk about their favorite sportsman/ sportswoman.
- Speaking skill.
II. Preparation:
- Visual aids: pictures.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
III. Procedures:

Sts and T's activities
Content
1. Warm up
T: shows the picture of 5 interlocked rings
? What are they?
Ss: They are 5 interlocked rings
? What do the 5 rings represent?
They represent the five major regions of the world (Africa, the America, Asia, Europe, and Oceania)
? What are the colors?
Ss: Blue, yellow, black, green, and red.
T: explains: every national flag in the world has at least one of the five colors.
T: leads in the lesson.
2. Presentation













I. Vocabulary.
* Preteach the vocab





* Checking teaching technique: Rub-out and remember
Fit
(adj):
Kh?e m?nh
Ring
(n):
Vng trn
Marathon
(n)
Ch?y ma ra tng
Achieve
(v)
??t ???c
Achievement
(n)
Thnh t?u
hold
(v)
T? ch?c

3. Practice.
T: devides the class into two teams. Each team takes turns to pick a small piece of paper
Written down the questions in activity 1 to aswer. One score is given to one correct answer
II. Practice
Activity 1
1. There are usually 22 players.(11 on each side)
2. It normally lasts 90 minutes (devided into two halves)
3. They are held every four years.
4. No, there weren't Olympic Games in 2011. (They were held in 2004, 2008, 2012?..)
5. A marathon is.
4. Production


5. Homework
Learn by heart all the new words and structures
Do exercises : C1,2 P12 (SBT)
Prepare for next.



* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************
















Date of planning: 8 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 15 / 2 / 2014

Period 68 UNIT 8 : Sport and games
Lesson 5: Skill 1

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to read for specific information about famous sportspeople. Talk about the activities/ sports/ games they do in their apare time.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure

Sts' and T's activities
Contents
1. Warm up
- Can you give me names of some famous football players in Viet Nam?
- Of whom you are his fan?
2. Activity
Reading
a, Pre- reading
- Work in pairs to discuss the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give their ideas.
b, While reading
- Tell Ss to read the passage quickly and check their ideas. Allow them to read in 5 minutes.
- Ask Ss to read the passage again, then answer the questions.
- T read aloud while they track the text with their fingers.
c, Post reading
- Let Ss talk about Pele
- Refer to other famous football players they know and ask them who they think the best football player they know and ask them who they think the best football player is.
Speaking
a, Pre - speaking
Exercise 4:
- Allow Ss time to read the table and tick the right column.
- T refer to people in Viet Nam in general, asking them why they usually or never play or do this or that.

b, While - speaking
Exercise 5:
Let Ss work in groups asking and answering questions. ( They should refer to the table in 4)
Exercise 6: Divide the class into groups of 4 or 5. Let them discuss their answers to the questions. When finish, T asks one S from each group " What is the most interesting thing you learnt from your discussion?
c, Post - speaking
In pairs, one S is an interviewer and other is a famous sportsperson. Ss role-play an interview. T and Ss can brainstorm possible interview questions before the activity.
3. Homework.
- Learn adjectives
- Do exercise in work book
- Prepare: Skill 2

- Huynh Duc, Hong Son?.

- Hong Son is my fan

Reading
1. Work in pairs. Discuss the questions.
1. Do you know Pele. The King of Football? What is special about him?
2. Where does he come from?
3. What other things do you know about him?
2. Read the text quicky to check your ideas in 1.
3. Read again and answer the questions.
Key:
1. Pele was born on 21st October 1940.
2. People called him " The King of Football" because he is such a good football player.
3. He became Football Player of the Century in 1999.
4. He scored 1, 281 goals in total.
5. Yes, he is.
Speaking
4. How often do you go/do/play these sports/games? Tick the right column.






5. Work in groups. What kind of sports/ games do you do most often? Why?

6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer the following questions.
1. Do you like football?
2. Do you play football or only watch it?
3. What other sports do you play?
- Do you play them well?
- When and how often do you play them?
4. Do you belong to any clubs?
5. If you don't play sport(s), what do you often do in your spare time?



* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************













Date of planning: 10 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 17 / 2 / 2014

Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games
Lesson 6: Skill 2

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to listen to get information about the sports/ games people play.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board, Stereo, CD
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1


2. Presentation.



3. Practice.

- Ask Ss which one they think Nick's family will choose as their holiday destination
- Play the recording for the answer.

- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.









3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Ask some questions to prepare the class for the activity







4. Production.

- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen places
-Check their ideas at the end






5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

-Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1

HL Bay and Hue

1Nick'family are in the travel agent's .They want to go on holiday.They are choosing a place from the brochure above .which place do they choose?

- Listen

- They go to HL BAy


2. Listen again and answer the following questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha Trang
2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is more interesting.
4- Yes, he is

WRITING
3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Do you have picture or can you draw a map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


4. In notes , fill each blank in the network with the inforation about the place.Then use these notes to write a short paragraph about it.


1 - where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================







Ngy so?n : 13/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 18/ 2/ 2014
Period 70: Unit 8 : Sports and games
Lesson 7: Looking back and project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: superative form of short adjectives.
- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their favourite sport or games.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your favourite
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four


- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.


-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity













-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.

- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. foootball 2.badminton 3. swimming .
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.


B. Grammar
- Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
- Activity 4 KEY
adj
comparative form
fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting
- Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.
KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
- Talk about sports and games.
-Make a description.
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

Ngy so?n : 17/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 22/ 2/ 2014
Period 71: Unit 9: Sports and games
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of the Sports and games
+/ Making and
+ Making and responding to a suggestion.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-Before Ss open their books, review the previous Unit focus on the key language and structures learnt.
- Write the unit title on the board "geography club " explain the meaning of surprise and asks Ss to guess what the picture might be about . Let Ss open their books and check their answers.
2. Presentation.
- T can also Ss to share any recent experiences of going on a picnic.
Play the recording
ss listen and read.
3. Practice.
- Tell Ss to refer back to the conversation to find the phrases
- Practice saying them together
- Pay attention to intonation when asking questions
- Ask pairs to role-play the short conversations before demonstrating for the class
- Demonstrate the game to the class first.







- Ask Ss label the pictures.

- T asks Ss to read the conversation in 1 again . tick the words you can find.

4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.


Ask Ss questions about the picture
eg: How many people are there?
What are they doing?





1. Listen and read.
*/ New words.
- tennis
- soccer
- go skiing
- cycling

a Answer the following questions
1- Vy is
2- She went to the wrong room
3- Uluru
4- Australia
5- An island
b.Classroomlanguage
1- Can you spell that ,please?
2- Can you repeat that .please
3- Can I come in.?
c.Brainstorm situations whenpeople use these sentences.Then role-play the situations with a partner.
2. Listen and repeat the following words
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5- cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach 9- island
10- valley

3. Now label the pictures.
1- mountain 2- river 3- waterfall
4- forest 5 cave 6- desert
7- lake 8- beach
9- island 10- valley

4. Read the conversation in 1 again . tick the words you can find.


* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************





















Date of planning: 11 / 2 / 2014
Date of teaching: 18 / 2 / 2014

Period 69 UNIT 8: Sport and games
Lesson 7: Looking back and Project.

I. Objectives.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review vocabulary, grammar, communication and understanding about some traditional games in project.
II. Teaching aids:
- Sub-board.
III. Procedure
I. Class organization.
- Greeting.
- Checking attendance:
II. New lesson.
Sts' and T's activities
Contents
1. Warm up
Ask Ss to look at the pictures
- What is the name of the sport in each picture?
- Which is your favorite sport?
2. Activity
a- Activity 1: Vocabulary
Ex 1- Ss do this task individually. T corrects their mistakes and lets them read the words correcly.
Ex 2- Let Ss repeat the words. Check their pronunciation. Tell Ss to write the answers in their notebooks. Then T corrects the mistakes.
b- Activity 2: Grammar
Ex3: Have Ss write their answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers.
Ex4: Ss work in pairs or groups to finish or write the sentences. T gives correction.
Ex5: Ss do the task individually first. Then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. T gives corrections. Have some Ss read the whole passage aloud. The rest of the class should track the text with their fingers as the other Ss read.






c- Activity 3: Communication
Ex6: Ss read the questions and answers once or twice. Then match them.
- Ss work in pairs and role- play the questions and answers.
- Ss write all sentences in their notebooks if have enough time.
* Finished!
Ask ss to complete the self-assessment. Identify any difficulties/ weak areas and provide further practice as needed.

3. Project
Ex1: - Have Ss read the passage carefully. Explain new words and anything difficult for Ss. Make sure they understand everything throughly.
Ex2: Let Ss work in groups. Each group chooses a game or sport. Let them talk, then write a bout it.




4. Homework
- Review vocabulary, grammar?
- Do exercises in workbook.
- Prepare: Unit 9 - Getting started


* Vocabulary
1. Find one odd word or prase in each line.
Key: 1. C 2.A 3. D 4. C 5. B
2. Read the four words in each line. Write the name of the game or sport the four words belong to
Key:
1- cycling
2- football
3- boxing
4- table tennis
5. basketball
* Grammar
3. Put the verbs in brackets in the correct form.
Key: 1. are 2. took 3. started 4. are playing
4. did you do- cycled - watched
4. What do you say in these situations?
Key:
1. Please stop making noise
2. Go out to play with your friends.
3. Don't feed the animals
4. Stand in a line, boys!
5. Don't tease the dog.
5. Fill in each blank with a word to finish the passage.
Key:
1. play 2. hear 3. games 4. sports 5. famous
* Communication
6. Match the questions in A with their correct answers in B.
Key: 1. a 2. e 3. b 4. c 5. d
Finished! Now you can
?
??
???
* talk about sports and games



* talk about things that happened in the past



* tell someone to do s.thing or give an order.



* Project
1- Read the passage about the game " Blind man bluff"
What you need: A blindfold, an open space and 5 players or more.
1. Stand in a circle, pick one?.
2. He/ She has to try and touch the others. the other players should try?.
3. When the seeker catches?
4. When the seeker guesses the other's name?
2- Choose one of the following sports/ games ( or one of your own) and write about it.
- Tug of war ( rope pulling)
- Skipping
- Marbles
* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************



Ngy so?n : 16/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 22/ 2/ 2014
Period 71: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about cities of the world, review vocabs about continients, countries, cities and landmark.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students
Board & contents
Warm up
(Network)
-Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get Ss to write down vocabs about TV programmes.
-Give feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.
-Provide some more vocabs about TV programmes.
A. WARM UP. (Network)
ruler


-Present new words.

- Check: Rub out and Remember.
B. NEW LESSON
* Vocabulary
continients
Asia
Europe
South America
North America

1. Listen and Read
? Look at the picture.
What are they doing?
What are they watching?
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to answer the questions.
-Get them to read aloud the answers.
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.
-Give feed back.
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to find the adjectives.

- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud.
- Correct some.


-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask qs to check Ss' understanding of the poem.
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct

- Ask Ss to match the words with the TV programmes
- Let ss listen and read.
- Explain some words if necessary.

1.Listen & Read




2. *Answers: 1F, 2F,3T

b. *Answers:
1.Asia
2. Europe
.........
2. Putting.
Example.
1. national television
2. new programme


3. Completing.
Answer key:
1. national
2. comedy



- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the things and say out the words, make up sentences with the words if there is time.
-Ss draw pictures next to new words in their vocabulary book.

C. CONSOLIDATION





Homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................











Ngy so?n : 17/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 24/ 2/ 2014
Period 72: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words of travel items
+/ Pronunciation /t/ and /st/
+/ New words: - plaster, walking boots, painkillers, sun cream, scissors, sleeping bag,
backpack
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-vocabulary
Travel items
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
desert, mountain.....
- Do I need a backpack in the desert?
- Why do you think so?

2. Presentation.

Ss listen and read.

3. Practice.
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with Ss.

- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
- Clicit ideas for sentense1.
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining sentences.
-Check their ideas at the end.

- Remind ss that in the introduce they thought about useful things for a beach,desert , mountain...
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday and they need to order the otems from very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8)

- Practice sounding out the sound
/t/ and /st/ together
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the words in the order they hear them.
- Play the recroding again

4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.




5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.


- Bring some travel items
ex: raincoat, umbrella backpack.....

1. Match theitems with the pictures then practise saying the following items .
*/ New words.
- plaster | ?pl??st? |
- painkillers | ?pe?nk?l? |
- sun cream | s?n kri?m |
- scissors | ?s?z?z |
- sleeping bag | ?sli?p?? b? |
- backpack | ?bkpk |

1. Match theitems with the pictures then practise saying the following items .
1- painkillers
2- scissors
3- plaster
4- sun cream
5- sleeping bag
6- walking boots
7- backpack
8- compass

2.Complete the following sentenses
1- compass
2- sun cream
3- painkills
4- backpack
5- plaster
3. Now put the items in order . Number 1 is most useful on holiday . Number 8 is the least useful.

they are going on a beach holiday
they need.......

4.Listen and number the words you hear.
best, boat, coast, lost, boot , desert.plaster. forest

5. Listen again and repeat the words.

6. Listen and repeat .Pay attention to the bold-typed parts of the words.
- Listen and repeat


Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................








Ngy so?n : 19/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 25/ 2/ 2014
Period 73: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 3: A closer look 2


I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use comparative and superlative adjectives, notice the pronunciation of comparative and superlative adjectives.
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: can, can't, must, mustn't, should, should.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :

2. Presentation.
- T can give some famous places and asks some questions about Mount everest, Tra Co beach, Amazon river?
3. Practice.
- Choose a more able St to act as Vy, and read the sentences to the class.
- Ss tick True(T) or False(F) in the box provided.
- T asks Ss to stand up if they think the sentence is True , or remain seated if they think the sentence is False.

- Play the recording and allow Ss to check their answers.

- Ask Ss to lookback at Vy's sentences, find and underline all the examples of -est.














- T asks all the students in the class do on their bokks, except only one who go to the board and do.
- Then T corrects if they do wrongly.


- T give the pieces of paper, and asks Ss to work in groups and make sentences about the place.

- T writes the example on the board , then guides the way to do.
- T can go arround the class and help the week students how to do.
4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.

*/ Brainstorming.

List the famous places which the Ss know.
- Ha Long bay, Da Lat city, Sapa,?



1.Vy is going to a quiz about wonders of the world.Read the sentences and guess if they are true or false.




2.Listen to Vy giving the answer to the qiuz . check your guesses.
Keys: 1.T 2.T 3.F
4.T 5.T 6.T
3. Underline all the words ending in - est in the quiz.
1. Mount everest is the highest mountain in the world.
2. Ba Be lake is the largest lake inVietNam.
?
4.Complete the table with the comparative and superlative adjectives

good
bad
tall
long
wide
large
hot
better
worse
taller
?
Best
The best
?
?

5. Now Vy is talking about other amazing places. Complete the passage..
1- hottest 2- hotter 3- coldest
4- coldest 5- colder 6- bigger
7- highest 8- smaller
6. Cut up some pieces of paper. Write the names of some famous places on them.
- eg:



"West Lake is the largest lake in HN"


7. Vy givingMai some feedback . read and underline the forms of must.


8 .Look at the classroom rules below. Write....




Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Ngy so?n : 24/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 1/ 3/ 2014
Period 74: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn't.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in the book at page 53 to ask some questions and the Ss answer.

2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the board and asks Ss to read all the newwords to check the pronunciation .

3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry.

- One student stands up and read the title of activity 1. An other translates it into Vietnamese what they are going to do.

- Ask Ss to use information in the text and their own ideas to fill in the " must " and " mustn't " columns.


- Create your own list and demonstrate the activity with a more able Ss
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end

Modal verbs
Must + V
You must be careful in the garden

- T asks them to work in open pairs to practice roling a play.

4. Production.
- Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.



- Where are they? What are they doing?
- Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
*/ Newwords.
- tent | tent |
- waterproof coat | ?w??t?pru?f k??t |
- sun hat | s?n ht |
- diverse | da??v??s |

2.Now make a list of the things must take to the Himalayas. then add things you mustn't take.

Must
mustn't
compass
sun cream
painkills
backpack
plaster

shorts
t- shirt

3. Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.Try to give reasons
What to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Compass
- sun cream
- Painkills
- Backpack
- plaster
Example:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK I think you must take a waterproof coat. It is the highest mountain in the world. It's cold and rainy there!
A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ?
4. Perform your Role-play for the class



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Ngy so?n : 26/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 3/ 3/ 2014
Period 75: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang's neighbourhood is?
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

I. warm up
Ss look at the picture of Khang's neighbourhood. Answer individually'

- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these words in the pasage.
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of the words in the context.



T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions.
-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.
-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.
-T corrects the answers:


_ Ss scan the passage again and find the information to complete the table.
_ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it
II. New lesson
A. Reading:
1. Vocabulary:
Suburb (n): ngo?i
Backyard (n): sn sau
Incredibly (adj): vcng, th?t ng?c nhin
Beach (n): bi bi?n
(to) dislike: khng thch
2. Anwer the questions:
* Key:
1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
2/ Because it has beautiful parks and sandy beaches and fine weather.
3/ They are very friendly.
4/ Because there're many modern buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
Like
- It's great for outdoor activities.
- There's almost everything here.
- Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
- People are incredibly friendly.
- The food is very good.




T reviews the expressions they can use to give directions.





T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering questions about the locations on the map.
-T may model this activity with a good student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their dialogues in front of the class.


B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the postcard and give directions:
Directions:
1. Go straight on
2. Turn left ...
3. Go past?
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
6. Go along
7. Cross
T:Can you tell us the way to the market?
S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street. Then take the second turning on the left.
After that go straight . It's on your left.
5/ Ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places in your city.



Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

Homework:
-Practice reading comprehension a blog.
Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 2.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................










Ngy so?n : 27/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden's capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


A. WARM-UP: Network
"Decribe your neighbourhood"



Pre
-Present some new words.






-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words.(EX1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get the places mumbered 1-4 from the You are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and completing the missing words in the dialogue.
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers. Share their ideas together.
- Play the recording the final time then check their answers.

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Vocabulary
super market: siu th?
cafe': c ph
secondary school: tr??ng c?p 2
lower secondary school : tr??ng c?p 1
sandy: ct
office: v?n phng, c? quan

2. Prediction. (Ex1)





3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school


EX2.Choose the correct places
1.A 2C 3F 4D



-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
-Hang the poster on the board.
- Share their answers with partners

-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or dislike about living in their neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations Share with their partners. T may read out the notes from some more able Ss to the whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their ideas
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T comments.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
1. sandy beaches
2.heavy tracffice......
8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
* Activity 4. Make notes about how to write a post card, think about the things you like or dislike about it
Who
What
.........


* Act 5: Make meaningful sentences
I'd like to tell you some good things and some bad things about living in my neighbourhood.


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

C. HOMEWORK
-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................








Ngy so?n : 1/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four



- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity

-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.

II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.
B. Grammar
Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
Activity 4 KEY
Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things







-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)


D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather ..is/ are?
- other...



-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
?????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????............










Ngy so?n : 5/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 10- 11/ 3 / 2014
Period 78 + 79: Review
I.THE AIMS AND REQUESTS
1. Knowledge:
At the end of this lesson Ss can review all the knowledge what they have learnt in units 7-9
2. Skill : reading, writing, listening and speaking.
II.PREPARATION.
T: Textbook, poster
Ss: Textbook, ss' book.
III. PROCEDURES:

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
A. Warm-up: Lucky number
(Use ex1 to warm up)
- Divide the class into 2 groups
- Each group in turn chooses one number and answers the question
- With each right answer, they will have one point. If they choose 'lucky number' they will have one point without answering the question.
- Which group has more points will win the game
B. New lesson
I. Language
1. Pnonunciation
Ex2: Practise saying the sentences. Pay attention to the pronunciation of the underlined words.
- Play the recording and ask Ss to listen carefully.
- Play the recording again and ask them to repeat the sentences.
- T checks on their pronunciation of the key sounds.
2. Vocabulary
Ex3: Choose A, B or C to fill the gaps in the passage.
- Ss do separately and share their answers later with a partner.
- Check Ss' answer.
Ex4: Choose one of the words/ phrases in the box to complete sentences 1-6.
- Ask ss to look at the whole sentence to decide what kind of word is missing before referring to the list of words given.

3. GRAMMAR
Ex5: Complete the sentences with the present simple, pp or past simple form of the verbs in brackets.
- This is a chance for ss to look back at the use of the verb tenses. Focus on the difference between the p.s and p.p
Ex 6: Are the underlined question words correct? If not, correct them.
- Ss must by now be familiar with, and quite skillful in, using question words. If the question word is wrong, ask ss to explain why.
Ex7: Use the superlatives in the box to complete the sentences.
- This look back at the use of superlatives with long adjectives. Check Ss' answers.
4. Everyday English
Ex8: Choose the best replies for the questions.
- This create a situation in which one can use the language already learnt, in daily conversation.
II. SKILLS
Reading
Ex1+2:
- Ss do this exercise individually, and then check it with their peers.
- Let ss discuss among themselves before finalizing the answers.
Speaking
Ex3: Work in groups. Interview your friends about their likes. Takes notes in the table and report it to your class?
- This, again, revises the language items learnt but in a more dynamic form: interviewing and reporting the results
Listening
Ex4: Listen to the interview with Nick and fill in the blanks.
- This listening aims at revision of present oerfect tense. Play the recording and let ss write down the answers.
Ex5: Listen to an interview with Phong and complete the answers with information from the listening.
- This listening requires ss to listen more attentively for specific information.
- Ask ss to read the questions first and determine what information is needed for the answer
- Then, T plays the recording.
Writing
6. Mark and Tim visited India last summer. Look at the information in the table to write a complete passage about their visit
- Ask ss to read the table and decide what tense/ sentence structure to use for the writing and how the information is organized. Only then should T let ss write.
- Ss might want to change some details from the table. Encourage them to do so.
They can start with:
Last summer, Tim and mark visited india. They.....
Homework:
- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare for the test 3


Key:
1. C
2. A
3. A
4. B
5. D
6. D
















Key: 1.A 2. B 3.A 4.A 5.C





Key:
1. Paris 2. Football
3. Local Television
4. Country 5. Remote Control
6. Summer Sports

Key:
1. started 2. play
3. had 4. is
5. bought 6. has worked

Key:
1. What 2. When
3. Cotrrect 4. How tall
5. Correct


Key:
the most expensive
the most popular
the most interesting
the most colourful
the most dangerous
Key:
1.e 2.a 3.c 4.b 5.d



Key:
Ex1: 1.B 2. A
Ex2:
Who's faster
putting your toes together
Who's faster
Putting your toes together







Key:
competition
skiing
country
canada
cartoon

Key:
running race
Thailand
Wait and see




Whole class


* Adjustment:
??????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

*****************************************


















Ngy so?n : 9/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 18/ 3/ 2014

Period 81: Unit 10: Our houses in the future
Lesson 1: Getting started

I. Objectives:
By the end of the lesson, students will be able to:
- listen and read for specific information about houses in the future.
- practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic " house in the future ".
II. Content:
- Vocab: house lexical items.
- Grammar: will / might
III. Preparations:
- Materials: Ss' books, text books, tape & radio.
- Method: T- WC, group work, individual work
- Anticipated problems: It's a long lesson with a lot of new words, there may not be enough time for all the activities.
IV. Procedures:

Teacher's activities
Students' activities
I. Warm up
- Teacher writes on the board: " My home " and ask what "home" means to them.
- T. writes their answer on the board.
- T. explains it can be the house or apartment where you live or can refer to a family living together.

- Listen and answer individually.

I. Presentation
1. New words.
- Teacher uses different techniques to teach vocab (situation, realia)
- T. reads the new words and ss. repeat .
- Checking vocab: Slap the board
* Set the scene:
- Ask ss to look at the picture on page 30.
? What are Mi and Nick doing?
? Where are they?
-We are going to listen and read a dialogue between Mi and Nick. They are talking on skype = a system that allows you to make telephone call using your computer
2. Listen and read
a).T. plays the recording the first time then ask ss to the family members Mi talks about.
? - Ss listen the second time and check the answers.


b)- Allow ss to read the conversation again and complete the sentences.
- Teacher gets feedback.



Apartment (n) c?n h?
Cousin (n) anh, em h?
living room (n) phng khch
bedroom (n) phng ng?
kitchen (n) phng b?p
bathroom (n) phng t?m
- Read in chorus.
- Answer the questions individually.

- look at the picture on page 30.
- They are playing computer.
playing games
using the internet.
- They are in their house/ room.


- Listen and give the answers.
- Listen and check the correct answers.

Grandparents

Uncle

Dad
V
Aunt
V
Mum
V
Cousin
V
Brother
V



- Work independently then share answer with their partner.
1: TV- sofa 4: noisy



II. Preposition
1.Prepositions of place ?
? Ask ss if they know the preposition in the box.
? Have ss do this exercise in pairs.
2. Ask ss to write the sentences individually then call 6 ss to write their answer on the board
3. -Explain some new words.
Pillow (n): ci g?i
Cap (n) : ci m?
Mouse (n): con chu?t
Let ss to look at the picture of the room and do ex.4 in pairs.
-Ask ss to correct the false sentences.
2: town house 5: three
3: sitting on the sofa
C: behind G: under
D: in
- Work individually.
Key:
1. F. The dog is between the bookshelf and the bed.
3. F. The clock is between the pictures.
4. F. The cat is in front of the computer.
5. F. The cap is next to the pillow.

4. Have ss look at the picture again and answer the questions.






III. Consolidation .
? What is the topic of the lesson today?
V. Homework
?Write ex.5 in the notebook.
? Do exercises in the workboook.
? Prepare: Closer Look 1
- Answer the questions.
Key: 1. They are on the desk and the bookshelf
2. They are on the floor.
3. Yes. It is
4. No. they are on the bed
5. It's behind the bookshelf.
6. No, it isn't. It's next to the desk.
- Answer individually.


- Take note.

Adjustments:
???????????????????????????????????????...
???????????????????????????????????................

=============================================























Ngy so?n : 16/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 22/ 3/ 2014
Period 82: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /dr/ and /tr/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get them to write the things in the room.
-Give feed back

A. WARM UP
TV


fridge




-Play the recording and let ss listen.
-Play again and pause for them to repeat each word.
-Ss repead- read
-Correct pronunciation.

-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 into groups.
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms.
-Check the answer. Explain to them which words go with each verb.

- Ss work in pair , using the information in 2, ask and answer questions.
-Then call some pair to practice in front of the class.
-Correct their mistakes.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
hi-tech robot
automatic dishwasher
automatic washing machine
*. Put the words into groups.
living room
bedroom
kitchen
bathroom
wireles TV



2. Matching.

Key. 1c 2d 3b 4c 5a
3. Ask and answer questions about appliances.
Eg: What does a wireless TV do ?
It helps us watch TV programmes from space.


-Let Ss practice the sounds /tr/ and /dr/ together. Ask Ss to observe the T's lip positions for these two sounds.
-Ss look at the T's lip position and listen and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as posible.
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to work individually.
- Ss work in individual then check their answer in groups.
-Call some to write the answers on the board .
-Give feed back.
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat sentence by sentence. Help them to recognize the two sounds then underline them in the sentences.
II. PRONUNCIATION
4. Listen and repeat
1. /dr/ :drop drip
2. /tr/: countryside travel





*. Listen to the words and put them into two groups.
Key.
/dr/
/tr/
drive
drop

travel
5. Say the words you have writen in the table. Pay attention to the words / dr/ and /tr/.Ss add some more words

Home work
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
C. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Practice the sounds /dr/ and /tr/.
-Do Ex in Ex book.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................


















Ngy so?n : 16/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 22/ 3/ 2014

Period 83: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 3: A closer look 2


I. Teaching points:
- Review will and might.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using will and might
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write sentences.
-correct, give marks.

A. OLD LESSON
Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
Eg: I play football for the school team.



-Introduce "Miss Nguyet is interviewing Duy for the school newsletter. Write the correct form of the verbs."
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 minutes.
- Correct their answer. Or give explaination if necessary.

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the interview.
-Observe and help ss when and where necessary.
-Correct Ss'pronunciation & verb form.


-Let Ss read the example to understand the task.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their notebooks, refering to the interview.
-Go around to help.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board.
-Check their answer sentence by sentence.


B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the future simple.
GRAMMAR:
The future simple.
Form: (+) S + will + V
(-) S + won't + V
(?) Will + S + V ?
Use: Something often happens in the future.
Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
* Key.
1. will 2. won't
3. will 4. will
5. will 6. will
7. will 8. won't
9. will 10. won't

Ex 2. Matching
* Key.1d, 2f , 3a , 4g.....



Ex3. make sentences with will and won't.
Eg:
Robots will cook meals
Robot won't take care of children


-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in getting started. And find out the verbs used in the present continuous tense.
-Write on the board.




-Ask Ss to study the example first then do the exercices.
- Correct.

-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

II. Review the possibility.

GRAMMAR. Might for possibility.
Form:
S + might + V-inf.
Use :Something is possible to happen in the future.
Ex 4:Listen and read two poems then decide whether the statements are T or F.
1T 2T 3F 4F 5T 6F
Ex 5: Work in groups, think about what you might do or have in the future.


-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Guide Ss to do home work.
C. HOME WORK
1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two tenses.
2. Do Ex at home:
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
















Ngy so?n : 22/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 25/ 3/ 2014

Period 84: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 4: COMMUNICATION
I.Teaching points:
-To develop speaking skill and communicate with their friends about making friends and how a good friend is.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters.
III. teaching steps.

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
Warm up
Things we might do in the future
Have Ss play the game
-Get them to prepare six small pieces guess the word
-Ss try to find out the letter building the word.
-T gives feed back and decide which is the winner of the game.
? excited
A. WARM- UP
Things we might do in the future

Pre-
-Present new words. Tell Ss that these vocabs will appear in the task that follow.
-Ss listen and answer to find out the meaning of the words.
-note down.
Have Ss play game: ROR

B. NEW LESSON
1. Vocabulary
Revise vocab


While -
- Ask some Ss how they often make friends, what they often say when they first meet a new friend. What question they often ask...
- Ss listen and answer.
- Let Ss read and tick the questions individually.
-Then ask them to discuss in group.
-Go round and ask why or why not they ticked this or that question.
-Allow Ss some time to write questions on a piece of paper, share them with the class or group.

- Ask Ss to give qualities of a good friend in class (adjective).
- Ss give as many words as possible.
-Divide the class into groups of 4or 5 .
- Ss take turns to interview the other members, using the questions.
- Encourage Ss to give nice sentences about friendship.
2.Game :
Things we might do in the future
- Are you from around here?
- Do you like pop music?
- How much pocket money do you get?
- What is your favorite subject at school?
- Are you hungry?
- Do you play football?
- How do you gat to school every day?
- Where do you go shopping?




3. Friendship quiz
Eg:
- friendly, generous, helpful, cheerfful, reserved, humorous, socable, nice, polite?



Eg: "Friend are forever"
????????..
Post-
-Choose some Ss to present to the class about their good friends and why they are good friends.


Eg:
"This is Nam, he is my classmate. He is very helpful, he often helps me in doing home work?.."
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
4. Home work
- Learn by heart new vocabs
-Do exercises in work book
-New lesson: Skill 1. (reading)

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

.........................................................................................................................














Ngy so?n : 26/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 31/ 3/ 2014

Period 86: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 4: Skills 1
I. Teaching points:
- To develop reading comprehension skill and to know some more new words in context: houses in the future and future appliances?
II.Teaching aids: - Poster
III. teaching steps

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

-Call 2 Ss to tell about the appliances in the future.
-Correct some and give mark.

A. OLD LESSON.
S1: washing machine
smart clock
Pre-
-Ask Ss to look at the three pictures then give their ideas about the schools in the pictures.
-Encourage Ss to give as many ideas as possible.


B. NEW LESSON
I. Introduction.
Eg:-In the future, I can see some girls are practicing doing something. So I think it is a comfortable school. It is a very good school.
-........

While
-Let Ss read the three passages to check their ideas.
-Ss do the task indidually in 5 minutes
-Note some information.

-Ask Ss to read the passages again, then find the words in the passages. Help Ss to understand the meaning of the words: explaining or examples or the Vietnamese equivalent.
-Ss should pay attention to the context of the words.


-Ask Ss to read the text again to find words to finish the sentences.
-Let Ss note where they found the information that helped them complete sentences.
-Ss can discuss and compare with their friends.
-Correct the answer then let Ss read aloud the sentences in chorus then in individual.
-Check pronunciation and intonation.
II. Reading
1. Ex1.
- Discussing with a partner



2. Ex2. check the idea.

-It is a boarding school: many students study and live there.
-The school is surrounded by mountains and fields.
-?international school?for Ss from year 1 to year 12, Ss learn English with foreign teachers.
-some creative students do drawings and paitings in the art club.
3. Ex3. Complete sentences.
1. Students study and live in a?..school. They only go home at weekend.
2. ??has an art club.
3. There are girls' school in?..
4. Around An Lac school, there are fields and...
5. At Vinabrita School, Ss learn E with?
Key:
1. boarding 2. Vinabrita 3. Australia
4. mountains 5. E speaking teachers.
Post-

-Allow Ss to complete the table.
-Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss then complete the table. (Ss can use the background of the school).
-Ask some to talk to the class.

-Discuss any common errors and provide further practice.

III. Speaking.
Ex4:Answer the questions
- Background of the schools.
1. the house will be located on the ocean
2. There will be a swimming pool in front and a large flower garden behind the house
3. No

-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign homework.

Home work
- Learn by heart new vocab
-Do exercises in work book


* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

=============================================











Ngy so?n : 27/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 1/ 4/ 2014

Period 87: Unit 12 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 4: Skills 2: listening - writing
I. Teaching points:
- Listen to Susie Brewer to understand more about houses.
- Help Ss write better with correct punctuation, write a description for a house.
II.Teaching aids:
-Posters, cassette.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- Ss discuss in groups

A. WARM-UP: Chatting
"The kind of house you like".
- I like.....


- Plays the recording.
- Ss listen only the first time.
-Allow Ss to read the exercise to guess the answer.
- Ss work in pairs, listen to the recording again to choose the correct answers.
- Let Ss listen sentence by sentence to check.

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Listen and choose the correct houses.
* Key:
Linda : picture 3
Nick : picture 2
2. Listen again and tick the columns:
Linda : 3,4,5,7.
Nick : 1,2,6


-Tell the class the important of punctuation marks.
-Hang the poster of Writing tip on the board.
-Ss study the Writing tip and may ask some information.
-Explain the new words and punctuation marks.

-The class comment and check.
- Give the correction.

-Allow Ss to correct and write in the notebooks.
-Go round and correct some.
- Give the key.


II. Writing.
3. Ss work in pairs discuss the ideas about their dream house
What type of house is it ?
Where is it located ?
What it looks like ?
What surrounds it ?
What appliances it has ?



4. Ss fill in the table about your dream house .
+ Type of house
+ Location
+ Number of rooms
+ Surrounding
+Things in the house .....

5. Use the information in 4 to write about dream house
In the future , My house will be ......


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

C. HOMEWORK
-Finish a writing about dream house.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.


* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................






















Ngy so?n : 30/ 4/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 5/ 4/ 2014

Period 88: Unit 10 : Our houses in the future
Lesson 7: LOOKING BACK

I. Teaching points:
- Through doing exercises, Ss revise the grammar points:
The simple present, the present progressive, vocabs.
II.Teaching aids:
poster, cassette.
III. Teaching steps

Teacher & Students
Board & contents

-Have Ss work in 2 teams.
-Ss write as many words as possible.

A. WARM-UP.
Brainstorming.
+ robot
* Appliances in the future + compass
+ ?



-Ss write the words.
- Correct mistakes.
-Repeat the words.



Ss write the answer.
-Correct

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Vocabs.
1. Match the pictures.
a. robot
b. automatic dishwasher
c. wireless TV
2. Think about what the appliances will do in the future.
1. Robot : clean our house, wash ....
.....................





-Call on Ss to give the answers.

-Give feed back and the correct answers.





-Ss do Ex individually.
- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.


-Ss do Ex in pairs.
- call some to do on the board.
- Correct.


II. Grammar.
4. Complete the sentences with will and won't.
1. won't
2. will
3. will
4.won't
5. will
6. won't
5. Complete the sentences using might or might not.
1. might
2. might
3. might not
4. might not
5. might , might
III. Communication
5. work in pairs. Using the information in 2 ask and answer the questions.


-Ask Ss to write future appliances at home
-Divide the class into 3 groups.
-Ask Ss to use the pictures and their imagination.

C. PROJECT
Your future appliances


-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.
D. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Prepare new lesson: Unit 11 - Getting Started.


* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
















Ngy so?n : 1/ 4/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 7/ 4/ 2014
Period 89: Unit 11: Our greener world
Lesson 1: Getting Started
I. Teaching points:
- By the end of the lesson Ss can understand about environmental problems and their effects.
- Training listening, reading, speaking, writing skills.
II. Teaching aids: - Pictures, posters, cassette & tape.
III. Teaching steps.

Teacher and Students
Board & contents
Warm up
Ss work individually to make and answer questions about environment.
A. WARM UP.
* Ask and answer:
Ss ask and answer the question about our environment.


-Present new words.

- Check: Rub out and Remember.
B. NEW LESSON
* Vocabulary
reused
recycled
reduced
pollution
environment

1. Listen and Read
? Look at the picture.
What are they talking about?
- Have Ss listen to the tape Then get them to answer the questions.
-Get them to read aloud the answers.
-Ask Ss to read the text again and check.
-Give feed back.
- Then ask Ss to read the conversation again to find the adjectives.

- Ss create short role-plays with the expressions.
- Call some pairs to speak aloud.
- Correct some.


-Play the recording. Let the whole class read the poem with the right intonation and rhythm. Ask qs to check Ss' understanding of the poem.
- Ss work in pairs and write poem about their partner then read the poem aloud.
- Listen &correct

- Ask Ss to match the words with the TV programmes
- Let ss listen and read.
- Explain some words if necessary.

1.Listen & Read

a. 1. on a picnic
2. reusable ; natural
3. the check-out
4. a / a reusable
5. recycling
b. 1-b 2-c 3-a
c. 1. understand
2. used to introduce ....
d. 1. I see
2. Not at all
3. By the way

2. *Answers:
1. soil pollution
2. deforestation
3. water pollution
4. noise pollution
5. air pollution

4. *Answers:
1b
2d
3e
4c
5a


- Ask Ss to look around the class, find out the things and say out the wordsplay the game.
-Ss write down as many as effects of the environmental problem as possible.
C. CONSOLIDATION


Homework
-Sumarize the main point of the lesson.
-Asign home work.


- Learn by heart new vocabulary
- Practice reading "Listen and read"
-Prepare new lesson: A closer look 1.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
















Ngy so?n : 1/ 4/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 7/ 4/ 2014
Period 90: Unit 11: Our greener world
Lesson 2: A closer look 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to :
+/ Use the words to recycle, reuse, recycle
+/ Pronunciation /a:/ and / /
+/ New words: - rubbish, bulb, can , .......
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
-vocabulary
Travel items
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :
desert, mountain.....
- Do I need a backpack in the desert?
- Why do you think so?

2. Presentation.

Ss listen and read.

3. Practice.
- Ask Ss practise saying vocabulary with Ss.

- Read and act out the sentences for Ss.
- Clicit ideas for sentense1.
- Then allow ss to complete the remaining sentences.
-Check their ideas at the end.

- Remind ss that in the introduce they thought about useful things for a beach,desert , mountain...
-Tell Ss they are going on a beach holiday and they need to order the otems from very useful (no1) to not very useful ( no8)

- Practice sounding out the sound
/t/ and /st/ together
- Play the recording once and ask Ss to number the words in the order they hear them.
- Play the recroding again

4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.


5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.


How to protect our environment ?

1. Match theitems with the pictures then practise saying the following items .
*/ New words.
- rubbish: rc th?i
bulb: bng ?i?n
can : lon
.....

2. Write a word in the box under each picture .
1- rubbish
2- plastic bag
3- glass
4- plastic bottle

3.Put the words into group
* Reduce:
* Reuse
* Recycle

4. Listen to the" Three Rs" song and then sing along

II. Pronunciation: /a:/, / /

5.Listen and repeat , pay attention to how the underlined part is pronounces.
fast
had
bag
plastic

6. Listen again and put the words in the correct column.
/a:/ or / /

7. Read the conversation, write /a:/ or / /
stand
class
ask

8. Listen and check their answers
- Listen and check.


Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................













Ngy so?n : 6/ 4/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 12/ 4/ 2014

Period 91: Unit 11: Our greener world
Lesson 3: A closer look 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to use conditional sentences - type 1 exactly.
- Ss can do all exercises correctly .
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: extra - boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Discuss some of the placesin the previous :




2. Presentation.
- T can introduces how to use conditional sentences - type 1 ?
If+S+V(present simple), S+will/won't+V(infi)
If clause main clause

3. Practice.
- SS read the sentences carefully and write the correct form of each verb in brackets.
- Ss come to the board and write down the answers.
- T corrects



- Ask Ss to read carefully and match.




- Ss read and make sentences








- Ss complete the sentences



4. Production.
-Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words. Prepare the new lesson.
- Do exercises in workbook
- Prepare fpr the next lesson.


*/ Revision :
What things can be reused, reduced , recycled ?
- Reused things : ....
- .....


1. Listen again to part of the conversation from Getting started. Pay attention to the conditional sentences- type 1.


2.Write the correct form of each verb in brackets.
Keys:
1.is ; will plant 2.recycle; will help
3.will save; don't waste
4. will have ; use 5. isn't; will be

3. Match an if clause in column Awith a suitable main clause in column B.
1c 2e 3b 4a 5d
4.Combine each pair of sentences below to make a conditonal sentences - type 1.

1. If we pollute the air, we will have breathing problems.
2. If people pollute the water, a lot of fish will die.
3. If we .......

5. Use your own ideas to complete the sentences. Share the answers with a classmate.
1. If you walk to school, ...........
2. If you use recyled paper , ..........


6. Fun matching.




- Homewok

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................




















Ngy so?n : 24/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 1/ 3/ 2014
Period 74: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 4: Communication
I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn't.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in the book at page 53 to ask some questions and the Ss answer.

2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the board and asks Ss to read all the newwords to check the pronunciation .

3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry.

- One student stands up and read the title of activity 1. An other translates it into Vietnamese what they are going to do.

- Ask Ss to use information in the text and their own ideas to fill in the " must " and " mustn't " columns.


- Create your own list and demonstrate the activity with a more able Ss
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end

Modal verbs
Must + V
You must be careful in the garden

- T asks them to work in open pairs to practice roling a play.

4. Production.
- Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.



- Where are they? What are they doing?
- Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
*/ Newwords.
- tent | tent |
- waterproof coat | ?w??t?pru?f k??t |
- sun hat | s?n ht |
- diverse | da??v??s |

2.Now make a list of the things must take to the Himalayas. then add things you mustn't take.

Must
mustn't
compass
sun cream
painkills
backpack
plaster

shorts
t- shirt

3. Role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell your partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.Try to give reasons
What to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Compass
- sun cream
- Painkills
- Backpack
- plaster
Example:
A: I want to go to the Himalayas.
B: OK I think you must take a waterproof coat. It is the highest mountain in the world. It's cold and rainy there!
A: Yes. Anything else?
B: ?
4. Perform your Role-play for the class



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................


Ngy so?n : 26/ 2/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 3/ 3/ 2014
Period 75: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang's neighbourhood is?
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

I. warm up
Ss look at the picture of Khang's neighbourhood. Answer individually'

- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these words in the pasage.
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of the words in the context.



T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions.
-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.
-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.
-T corrects the answers:


_ Ss scan the passage again and find the information to complete the table.
_ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it
II. New lesson
A. Reading:
1. Vocabulary:
Suburb (n): ngo?i
Backyard (n): sn sau
Incredibly (adj): vcng, th?t ng?c nhin
Beach (n): bi bi?n
(to) dislike: khng thch
2. Anwer the questions:
* Key:
1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
2/ Because it has beautiful parks and sandy beaches and fine weather.
3/ They are very friendly.
4/ Because there're many modern buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
Like
- It's great for outdoor activities.
- There's almost everything here.
- Most houses have a backyard and a frontyard.
- People are incredibly friendly.
- The food is very good.




T reviews the expressions they can use to give directions.





T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering questions about the locations on the map.
-T may model this activity with a good student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their dialogues in front of the class.


B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the postcard and give directions:
Directions:
1. Go straight on
2. Turn left ...
3. Go past?
4. Take the first
5. Go to the end
6. Go along
7. Cross
T:Can you tell us the way to the market?
S1: First, go along Cu Chinh Lan street. Then take the second turning on the left.
After that go straight . It's on your left.
5/ Ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places in your city.



Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

Homework:
-Practice reading comprehension a blog.
Review the lesson.
-Prepare skill 2.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................










Ngy so?n : 27/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden's capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


A. WARM-UP: Network
"Decribe your neighbourhood"



Pre
-Present some new words.






-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words.(EX1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get the places mumbered 1-4 from the You are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and completing the missing words in the dialogue.
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers. Share their ideas together.
- Play the recording the final time then check their answers.

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Vocabulary
super market: siu th?
cafe': c ph
secondary school: tr??ng c?p 2
lower secondary school : tr??ng c?p 1
sandy: ct
office: v?n phng, c? quan

2. Prediction. (Ex1)





3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school


EX2.Choose the correct places
1.A 2C 3F 4D



-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
-Hang the poster on the board.
- Share their answers with partners

-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or dislike about living in their neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations Share with their partners. T may read out the notes from some more able Ss to the whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their ideas
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T comments.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
1. sandy beaches
2.heavy tracffice......
8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
* Activity 4. Make notes about how to write a post card, think about the things you like or dislike about it
Who
What
.........


* Act 5: Make meaningful sentences
I'd like to tell you some good things and some bad things about living in my neighbourhood.


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

C. HOMEWORK
-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................








Ngy so?n : 1/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four



- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity

-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.

II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.
B. Grammar
Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
Activity 4 KEY
Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things







-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)


D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather ..is/ are?
- other...



-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
?????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????............





















Ngy so?n : 16 / 4 / 2014
Ngy ktra: 22 / 4/ 2014

Period 96: Test 4

I. M?c ?ch yu c?u:
1. ??c hi?u :
??c ?o?n v?n l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng , d?a vo n?i dung bi h?c.
2. Vi?t:
Bi?t s? d?ng c?u trc v ng? php s?p x?p cc t? ? cho thnh cu hon ch?nh.
3. Ki?n th?c ngn ng? :
Bi?t phn bi?t cch pht m c?a t?, s? d?ng ki?n th?c ng? php ? h?c ?? chia ??ng t? v l?a ch?n ?p n ?ng.
II. Chu?n b? :
Bi photo.
III. Ma tr?n :




C?p ??
t? duy



T?ng
Ch? ??

Nh?n
bi?t
Thng
hi?u
V?n
d?ng



TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL
TNKQ
TL

Language
Pho


4
1.0



4
1.0
focus
Vocab
6
3.0
4
1.0




10
4.0

Gram



8
2.0


8
2.0
Reading




8
2.0


8
2.0
Writing






4
1.0
4
1.0
T?ng

10


4.0
20


5.0
4

1.0
34
10.

IV. ?? bi :
Question I : Choose the correct answers
1 A. dad B. hat C. plant D. happy
2. A. favourite B. slight C. fine D. high
3. A. gather B. month C. father D. brother
4. A. that B. tap C. backpack D. classmate
Question II :Matching:
1. Where will we live ? A. Under the ocean
2. I think he might go to University ? B. in the future
3. What will ther be around the house ? C. last week
4. You can take these bottles to the factory D. to recycle them
5. If students use recycled paper E. they will save a lot of trees
6. I went to Ha Noi F. - Many tall trees
Question III : Give the correct form of the verbs
1. He ( not meet ) his sister for 6 months.
2. If she ( not eat ) less, she ( be ) fat.
3. They ( go ) out last night? - No, they ( stay ) at home and ( watch ) TV.
4. She might ( live ) with her aunt in Ha Noi.
5. Tuan usually ( have ) breakfast at 6 o'clock.
Question IV : Choose the correct word marked A,B or Cto fill each blank in the following passage.
AIR QUALITY
People need to breathe. If they don't breathe, they ??? (1) ??. die. But how clean is the air people breathe? If they breathe ??? (2) ??. air, they will have breathing problems and become ? (3) ??.. Plants and animals need ?? (4) ??. air too. A lot of the things ? (5) ??. our lives create harmful gases and ? (6) ??.the air dirty, like cars, motorbikes and factories. Dirty air is called " ??? (7) ??. air ". Air pollution can also make our Earth warmer. The problem of air pollution started with the burning ??? (8) ??. coal in homes and factories.
1. A. will B. are C. must
2. A clean B. fresh C. dirty
3. A.well B. better C. ill
4. A. clean B. safe C. dirty
5. A. at B. in C. on
6. A. make B. get C. give
7. A. pollute B. polluted C. polluting
8. A. in B. for C. of
Question V : Complete the following sentences using given words:
1. soil / plants/ if / the / will / polluted / is / die.
2. on / be / there / Friday / meeting / will / a .
3. housework / help / might / robots / do / the / think / us / I.
4. rooms / in / there / house / be / four / will / my.
Question VI : Complete the following sentences with suitable prepositions:
1. You should have a shower instead ??????.... a bath.
2. I have bought a lot ??????.... things yesterday.
3. What type ??????.... house do you think it is ?
4. He can't go with us because he has to look ??????.... his younger brother.




* ?p n v thang ?i?m ch?m:

Question I: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25?
1C 2A 3B 4D
Question II: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,5?
1E 2C 3F 4B 5A 6D
Question III: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25?
1.hasn't met
2. doesn't eat - will be
3. Did they go - stayed - watched
Question IV: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25?
1. of 2. on 3. of 4. after
Question V: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25?
1A 2C 3C 4A 5B 6A 7B 8C
Question VI: M?i ?p n ?ng ???c 0,25?
1. If the soil is polluted, plants will die
2. There will be a meeting on Friday
3. I think robots might help us do the housework .
4. There will be four rooms in my house.

Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................



















I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four


- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity














-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.

B. Grammar
- Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
- Activity 4 KEY
adj
comparative form
fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
large
quiet
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting
larger
quieter
- Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather ..is/ are?
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.
Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................

Ngy so?n : 16/ 11/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 23/ 11/ 2013
Period 37: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 5: Skills 1

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to know and understand the famous places such as : Ha Long Bay and Hue City. .
- Review the comparatives and supperatives.
- Newwords: essential, traditional, central, attraction, cuisine.
- Skill: Reading.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T asks Ss to look at the pictures at page 54 and make predictions about the text.






2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the blackboard.



3. Practice.
- Ss read the newwords in chorus. Notice the pronunciation.
- T corrects if they pronounce wrongly.

- Ask ss to find the four words in the passages and underline them.
- Check their meaning.
- Ask ss to read the sentences then write true or false .



- Answer the following questions.
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play.
Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end.




- Discuss with Ss which things they find interesting /uninteresting about HL Bay and Hue


- Ask Ss to close their book
divide ss into A and B.
- Tell group A to describe HL Bay.
- Tell group B to describe Hue.
4. Production.
- Tell the class they are ivsiting in your hometown
- Ask Ss to suggest some advice
- Use must /mustn't
5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.Prepare the new lesson.

4. Where is the passage from?
5. What is it about ?
6. What do you know about the subject?
1.Before you Read .Look at the picture below and make prediction about the text. Then read and check your ideas.
1- HaLong bay and Hue
2- places
3- I ...
*/ Newwords
- essential | ??sen?l |
- traditional | tr??d??n?l |
- central | ?sentr?l |
- attraction | ??trk?n |
- cuisine | kw??zi?n |
2. Find these words in the passages in 1 . then check the meaning.

Essential , activities , attaction , cuisine

3. Read the following sentenses.then tickT or F
1. In HL Bay some of the island look like people or animals.
1- T 2- F 3- T 4- F 5 T
4. Now answer the following questions
1- HL Bay in Quang Ninh
2. You must take a boat ride.
3.A visit to the imperial City is more important.
4.Bacause people travel there just for the food.
SPEAKING
5. Work in pairs. Make notes about ona of the places in the brochure. use the information in the text and your own ideas.
- Tuan Chau is the biggest island in HL Bay
- VNese seafood
- Traditional dance
6. Tell your partner about the place.


7. Your friends are visiting your town. Think about what they must and mustn't do while they are there. role- play the conversation in group.
a- Things they must do/bring:
b: Things they mustn't do/bring:

Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================





















Ngy so?n : 18/ 11/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 25/ 11/ 2013
Period 38: Unit 5 : Natural wonders of the world
Lesson 6: Skills 2

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to : listen to what the Nick's family are talking in the travel agent and answer the questions.
- Write a travel guide about a place the students know.
- Skill: Listening and writing.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents
1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1


2. Presentation.



3. Practice.

- Ask Ss which one they think Nick's family will choose as their holiday destination
- Play the recording for the answer.

- Wok in pairs to ask and answer.









3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Ask some questions to prepare the class for the activity







4. Production.

- Ask Ss to make note about their chosen places
-Check their ideas at the end






5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.

-Ask Ss to recall the two places in the brochure in skills 1

HL Bay and Hue

1Nick'family are in the travel agent's .They want to go on holiday.They are choosing a place from the brochure above .which place do they choose?

- Listen

- They go to HL BAy


2. Listen again and answer the following questions.
1- Ha LONG Bay , Hue ,da Nang, or Nha Trang
2- Can we se a picture of the hotel in Mui Ne ?/ Which is cheaper , Mui Ne or HL Bay?
3- Mui Ne is cheaper but I think HL Bay is more interesting.
4- Yes, he is

WRITING
3. Write a travel guide about a place you know
- Do you have picture or can you draw a map of the place?
- What natural wonders are there?
- How do they compare to other natural wonders?
- What things can you do there?
- What things must you do?


4. In notes , fill each blank in the network with the inforation about the place.Then use these notes to write a short paragraph about it.


1 - where is it?
2- How far is it?
3- How can you get there?
4- What is it like?
5- What is special about it?
6- what can you do there?



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................

=================================















Ngy so?n : 16/ 4 / 2014
Ngy d?y: 21/ 4 / 2014

Period 96: Unit 11 : Our greener world
Lesson 7 : Looking back and project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review words related to environment and conditional sentence - type 1.
- They also communicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
* Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
II. TEACHING STEPS
Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe our environment problems

I. WARM-UP.
Group of four

- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity













-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.

- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.
II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY 1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic
4 incovenient 5. cheaper/ more expensive.

B. Grammar
- Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
- Activity 4 KEY
adj
comparative form
fast
convenient
noisy
difficult
heavy
expensive
happy
hot
polluted
exciting
faster
more convenient
noisier
more difficult
heavier
more expensive
happier
hotter
more polluted
more exciting
- Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.
KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things




-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)

D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is / what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather...
- other...
-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
- Prepare for the test
Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................




Ngy so?n : 13/ 8/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 20/ 8/ 2013
Period 2: Unit 1: My new school
Lesson 2: A closer look 1
I. Teaching points:
- Review vocabularies.
- Pronounce correctly the sounds /ou/ and /A/
II.Teaching aids: cassette, poster.
III. Teaching steps.
Teacher & Students
Board & contents

Have Ss work in 2 teams
-Get them to write the subjects they have learnt.
-Give feed back

A. WARM UP
Math



English



-Play the recording and let ss listen.
-Play again and pause for them to repeat each word.
-Ss repead- read
-Correct pronunciation.


-Let Ss work in pairs, put the words in 1 into groups.
- Ss work in pairs in 4 ms.
-Check the answer. Explain to them which words go with each verb.




-Tell Ss to do the task individually.
-Then call some ss to write on the board.
-Correct their mistakes.








-Ask Ss to write sentences about themselves in their notebooks, using combination above.
- Ss write as many sentences as posible.
-Go around the class and correct some.
B. NEW LESSON.
I. VOCABULARY.
1. Listen and repeat the words.
Physic exercises
English vocabulary
History football
Home work lessons
Judo music
School lunch science
2. Put the words into groups.
play
do
have
study
Football
music
Homework
Judo
exercises
School lunch
lessons
Physics
English
History
Vocabs
science
3. Put one of these words in each blank.
lesson football
science judo
homework
1. I do??with my friend, Vy.
2. Duy plays?.for the school team.
3. All the?. new school are interesting.
4. they are healthy. They do?.every day.
5. I study maths, English and?..on Mondays.
Key. 1. homework 2. football
3. lessons 4. judo
5. science
4. Write sentences about yourself using the combination above.
Eg: I/ We have English lessons on Tuesday and Thursday.
?????????


-Let Ss practice the sounds /ou/ and /A/ together. Ask Ss to observe the T's lip positions for these two sounds.
-Ss look at the T's lip position and listen and distinguish between the two sounds.
-Play the recording and ask ss to listen and repeat.
- Ss listen and repeat as many times as posible.
-Play the recording twice. Allow Ss to work individually.
- Ss work in individual then check their answer in groups.
-Call some to write the answers on the board .
-Give feed back.
Play the recording. Ss listen and repeat sentence by sentence. Help them to recognize the two sounds then underline them in the sentences.
II. PRONUNCIATION
5. Listen and repeat
1. /??/ :judo going homework open
2. /?/: brother Monday mother month





6. Listen to the words and put them into two groups.
Key.
/??/
/?/
Rode
Don't
Hope
Homework
post
Some
Monday
Month
Come
one
7. Listen and repeat. Underline the sounds /??/ and /?/ you hear.

Home work
-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Assign home work.
C. HOMEWORK.
-Learn by heart new words.
-Practice the sounds /??/ and /?/.
-Do Ex?in Ex book.
* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngy so?n : 15/ 8/ 2013
Ngy d?y: 22/ 8/ 2013
Period 3: Unit 1 : My new school
Lesson 3: A closer look 2
I. Teaching points:
- Review Present simple and Present continuous tenses.
- Practice speaking, reading and writing using these tenses
II.Teaching aids: posters,cassette and tape.
III. Teaching steps:

Teacher & Students
Board & contents
-Ask 3 Ss to go to the board and write sentences.
-correct, give marks.

A. OLD LESSON
Ask some Ss to write their own sentences.
Eg: I play football for the school team.



-Introduce "Miss Nguyet is interviewing Duy for the school newsletter. Write the correct form of the verbs."
-Let Ss do the task individually in 5 minutes.
- Correct their answer. Or give explaination if necessary.

-Ask Ss to work in pairs to role-play the interview.
-Observe and help ss when and where necessary.
-Correct Ss'pronunciation & verb form.


-Let Ss read the example to understand the task.
-Allow Ss to write the sentences in their notebooks, refering to the interview.
-Go around to help.
-Call 2-3 Ss to write on the board.
-Check their answer sentence by sentence.


- Then ask ss to give the rule and use of the present simple themselves.
- Give more examples.
1. I always walk to school.
2. He always walks to school.
3. We don't like playing football.
4. She doesn't like playing football.

- Ss work in pairs. Take turns to ask questions and give answers.
-Go round and correct mistakes or give help when necessary.

B. NEW LESSON.
I. Review the present simple.
Ex1.Write the correct form of the verbs.
* Key.
1. has 2. Do you have
3. love 4. Does Vy walk
5. ride 6. teaches
7. doesn't play 8. reads
9. go 10. do

Ex2.Role-play the interview.




Ex3. Correct sentences.
Eg:
Duy's new school has a small playground.
- Duy's new school has a large playground.
Key:
1. Duy lives near here.
2. Duy likes/ loves his new school.
3. Vy and Duy ride to school.
4. Mr Quang teaches Duy English.
5. At break time, Phong reads in the library.
GRAMMAR:
The present simple.
Form: (+) S(I, You, We, They) + V
S(She, He, It) + Vs/es
(-) S + don't/ doesn't + V
(?) Do/ Does + S + V ?
Use: Something often happens or fixed.
Ex4: Make questions then interview.
1.You/ ride your bicycle / to school.
-Do you ride your bicycle to school?
2. You/ read/ in the library/ at break time.
3. You/ like your new school.
4. Your friends / go to school / with you.
5. You/ do your home work/ after school.


-Ask Ss to refer to the conversationg in getting started. And find out the verbs used in the present continuous tense.
-Write on the board.








-Ask Ss to study the example first then do the exercices.
- Correct.









-Ask them to say the differences between the two tenses.




-Ask Ss to do the task in pairs.
-Call some to give their answers.
- correct their mistakes and explain why?






-Ask Ss to do Ex at home.

II. Review the present continuous.
Ex5. Underline the present continuous in Getting started.
Eg: is knocking?, is having?, are wearing?
GRAMMAR. The present continuous.
Form:
(+) S + am/is/are + V-ing.
(-) S + am/is/are not + V-ing
(?) Am/Is/Are + S + V-ing?
Use :Something is happening now.
Ex6: Complete the sentences with the correct form of the verbs.
Eg: -Yummy! I (have)........school lunch with my new friends.
-Yummy! I am having school lunch with my new friends.
1. I am not playing football now. I'm tired.
2. Shh! They are studying in the library.
3. Duy and Phong aren't doing their homework.
4. Now I am having an English lesson with Mr Lee.
5. Phong, Vy and Duy are riding their bicycles to school now.
Something often happens or fixed: The present simple
Something is happening now: the present continuous
Ex7: Choose the correct tense of the verbs.
1. My family have/ are having dinner now.
2. Mai wears/ is wearing her uniform on Mondays and Saturdays.
3. The school year in Vietnam starts/ is stating on Seps 5th
4. Now Duong watches/ is watching Ice Age on Video.
5. Look! The girls kip/ are skipping in the school yard.
Ex8. Read Vy's e-mail to her friend.


-Summarize the main points of the lesson.
-Guide Ss to do home work.
C. HOME WORK
1. Learn by heart the form and use of the two tenses.
2. Do Ex8 at home:
-Underline things that often happen or are fixed.
-then underline things that are happening.
-Compare Vy's first week with yours.
Eg: + Both Vy and I are having an interesting first week.
+ I wear uniform every day but Vy wears uniform only on Mondays and Saterdays.
+ ?.
3. New lesson: Communication.

* Adjustment:
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................

Ngy so?n : 23/ 4 / 2014
Ngy d?y: 28/ 4 / 2014

Period 101: Unit 12 : Robots
Lesson 4 : Communication

I. Objectives.
- By the end of this lesson, students will be able to understand the travel guide .
- Ss can know how to use modal verbs: must, mustn't.
- Ss role-play being a tour guide and a tourist.Tell their partner what to prepare for their trip to the Himalayas.
- Newwords: tent, waterproof coat, sun hat, diverse.
- Skill: Speaking.
II. Preparation.
- Teacher: Auxiliary boards.
- Students: Prepare the new words , practice pronouncing these words.
III. Procedure.

Teacher's and students'activities
Contents

1. Warm up. To introduce the new lesson.
- T can use the picture of mount Everest in the book at page 53 to ask some questions and the Ss answer.

2. Presentation.
- T writes the newwords on the board and asks Ss to read all the newwords to check the pronunciation .

3. Practice.
- First, all of the Ss in the class read the travel guide entry in silience.Then T calls some Ss read aloud the travel guide entry.

- One student stands up and read the title of activity 1. An other translates it into Vietnamese what they are going to do.



- Create your own list and demonstrate the activity with a more able Ss
- Then ask the class to complete the role- play
- Ask pairs to demonstrate for the class.

- Check their ideas at the end

- T asks them to work in open pairs to practice roling a play.

4. Production.
- Guide the way to do .
- Ss can present their flowers to class or make a display of the flowers on a noticeboard.

5. Home work.
- Copy and learn the new words.
- Prepare the new lesson.



- Where are they? What are they doing?
- Must we take a torch to mount Everest?
1.Read the travel guide entry
*/ Newwords.
- comb
- bend over
- shout
- gardening
* Listen and fill in each gap with the word they hear.
1. words
2. shoes
3. first
4. school
5. water
2.Interview three people about what skills they want their robots to have.






3. Perform your Role-play for the class



Adjustment:
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................................................................................















Ngy so?n : 24/ 4/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 29/ 4/ 2014

Period 102: Unit 12 : Robots
Lesson 5 : Skills 1

I. TEACHING POINTS:
By the end of the lesson, Ss can :
- read a postcard for specific information about famous places.
- ask and answer questions about the way to get to the places .
II.Teaching aids: Poster, pictures.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

- T asks Ss: Where do you think Khang's neighbourhood is?
What do you think about it?
Do you like living there? Why? Why not?

I. warm up
Ss look at the picture of Khang's neighbourhood. Answer individually'


- T asks Ss to scan the blog to find these words in the pasage.
- T may help Ss find out the meaning of the words in the context.



T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions.
-T asks Ss to note where they found the information that helped them to answer the questions.
-Ss can compare their answers with their partners.
-T corrects the answers:


_ Ss scan the passage again and find the information to complete the table.
_ Ss note where they found the information and compare with their partners.
- Feedback: 2Ss write on the board.
- T checks and corrects it

II. New lesson
A. Reading:
1. Vocabulary:
Space robots
apart from
types
space station
planet
2. Anwer the questions:
* Key:
1/ It is in the surburbs of Da Nang
2/ Because it has beautiful parks and sandy beaches and fine weather.
3/ They are very friendly.
4/ Because there're many modern buildings and offices in the city.
3/ Fill in the table with the information:
3. Read the text again and fill the table
- Home robots : can cook , ...
- Teaching robots: ....
- Worker robots : .....



T reviews the expressions they can use to give directions.



T asks Ss to work in pairs, asking and answering questions about the locations on the map.
-T may model this activity with a good student.
T calls some pairs to talk before the class
-Ss work in pairs to practice the dialogue.
-T selects some good pairs to act out their dialogues in front of the class.


B. Speaking:
4/ Look at the table and write what they think each type of robot will be able to do in the future:
- Home robots : they will be able to recognise our faces ...
- Teaching robots: ....
- Worker robots : .....
5/ Work in groups, talking about type of robots and what they will be able to do in the future..



Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

Homework:
-Practice reading comprehension a blog.
Review the lesson.
-Prepare skills 2.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................
??????????????????????????????????........................










Ngy so?n : 27/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 4/ 3/ 2014
Period 76: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 6: SKILLS 2
:
I. TEACHING POINTS:
- Listening to understand the passage about Sweden's capital and some famous people
- Writing a postcard.
II.Teaching aids: -Posters, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS.

Teacher & Ss
Board & contents

- Ss work in 2 teams.
- Check and correct


A. WARM-UP: Network
"Decribe your neighbourhood"



Pre
-Present some new words.






-Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words.(EX1)
Ask Ss to read the rubric and study te map carefully. Pair work to discuss how to get the places mumbered 1-4 from the You are here point.( Ex2)
While
-Play the recording for checking and completing the missing words in the dialogue.
-Play the recording twice.
- Ss listen choose the correct answers. Share their ideas together.
- Play the recording the final time then check their answers.

B. NEW LESSON
I. Listening.
1. Vocabulary
super market: siu th?
cafe': c ph
secondary school: tr??ng c?p 2
lower secondary school : tr??ng c?p 1
sandy: ct
office: v?n phng, c? quan

2. Prediction. (Ex1)





3. Check the prediction. (Ex1)
1. the end 2 right 3.lower secondary school
4. Le Duan street 5.secondary school


EX2.Choose the correct places
1.A 2C 3F 4D



-Ask Ss tick what they like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
-Hang the poster on the board.
- Share their answers with partners

-Ask Ss make notes on what they like or dislike about living in their neighbourhood.Ask them not to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations Share with their partners. T may read out the notes from some more able Ss to the whole class.

- Set up the writing activity.Use their ideas
they have made in 4. Ask Ss to brainstorm for language necessary for writing.
? Write the first draft.then have them write their final version.
- Go around and Correct some
T display all or some of the leaflets on the wall/ notice board. Other Ss and T comments.
II. Writing.
1.Pre:EX3. Tick (V) what you like or don't like about a neighbourhood.
1. sandy beaches
2.heavy tracffice......
8. many shops, and markets
2. Practice.
* Activity 4. Make notes about how to write a post card, think about the things you like or dislike about it
Who
What
.........


* Act 5: Make meaningful sentences
I'd like to tell you some good things and some bad things about living in my neighbourhood.


-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

C. HOMEWORK
-SS edit and revise their writing as homework.
Write the final version at home.
-Prepare new lesson: Looking back.


Adjustments:
????????????????????????????????????????...
??????????????????????????????????........................








Ngy so?n : 1/ 3/ 2014
Ngy d?y: 8/ 3/ 2014
Period 77: Unit 9: Cities of the world
Lesson 7: Looking back + Project

I. TEACHING POINTS:
- By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to review name of places and adjectives and their opposites and the grammar points: comparative form of the adjectives.
- They also comunicate using suggestions and and create an audio guide.
- Write a description of their ideal neighbourhood.
II.Teaching aids: poster, cassette.
III. TEACHING STEPS

Teacher and Students' activities
Contents and Board

-Decribe in your neighbourhood
I. WARM-UP.
Group of four



- Tell Ss to write the words in their notebooks individually and then check with thier partners. then correct the mistakes. Let them repeat the words. Check their pronounciation.
_ Ask Ss read the sentences carefully and complete them with the adjectives they have learnt in Unit 4. Remind them that the words, phrases and sentences before and after the blands will provide the context for them to choose the correct adjectives.

-For these ex, ask Ss to do them individually first. then they can check their answers with a partner before discussing the answers as a class. However, tell Ss to keep a record of their original answers so they can
use that information in their Now you can......statements.

-T elicits the language being practiced in this activity

-Ss read the questions and answer once or twice( they read them aloud). Then match them. If there is time, have them write their notebooks.
- Ss work in pair and role play the questions and answers .
Finished! Finally ask ss to complete the self assesment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.

II. NEW LESSON:
A Vocabulary:
1. Activity 1: Write the correct for each picture.
KEY 1. Statue 2.Railway station 3. park 4 temple 5. memorial 6 cathedral.
2. Activity 2
KEY
1. noisy 2 narrow 3 historic 4 incovenient
5. cheaper/ more expensive.
B. Grammar
Activity 3 KEY
one syllabe
2 syllabes
3 syllabes
fast
hot
large
happy
noisy
quiet
heavy
exciting
expensive
convenient
difficult
polluted
Activity 4 KEY
Activity 5 KEY
1 noisier than 2 more modern than
3 more convenient than
4 more beautiful than
5 more expensive than
C. Communication
:*Activity 6.KEY: a-c d-e f-g h-b
:*Activity 7.
Finished! Now you can..



. name places
. give directions
.use adjective to describe places.
.compare things







-T ask ss look at the picture of two neighbourhoods in ss' book, point out the tipical features of them.
- SS work in groups to discuss their ideal neighbourhood, using the pictures and their imagination.( if have time)


D. Project
What is your ideal neighbourhood?
1.Find a photo or draw a picture of your neighbourhood.
2. write a description of it.
- where it is
- what it has
- how the people/ the streets/ the weather ..is/ are?
- other...



-Summarize the main point of the lesson.
-Assign home work.

III. HOMEWORK.
-Learn the new words.
-Compare somethings in your school.
-Make a description.

Adjustments:
?????????????????????????????????????
??????????????????????????????????............
















Ngy so?n : 9 / 5 / 2014
Ngy d?y : 12-13 / 5 / 2014
Period 108 + 109 : Revision
I. Aim :
Revise what Ss study in English 6
- Tenses :
+ present simple tense
+ Present progressive tense
+ future tense
+ present perfect tense
- Grammar :
+ conditional sentences type 1
II.Practice
Exercise 1: Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences
1, How .....do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week.
a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ............sports .
a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They .....playing soccer.
a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I'm going to stay.... a week .
a, in b, at c, from d, for
5, ....is the weather like in Hue?
a, when b, what c, where d, how
6, Let's ........to the cinema .
a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...............is the cake ?
a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He .......TV at the moment
a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is watching
* Answer key : 1A 2A 3B 4D 5B 6A 7B 8D
Exercise 2: Put the verb in the correct tense
1, We...............................(play) volleyball now.
2, This summer vacation, Hoa ....................(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ........... ........Lan.............(travel) to school?
4, I usually .....................(go ) camping in the summer .
* Answer key :
1. Are playing
2. is
3. often does - travel
4. go

Exercise 3: Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):
A B
1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I'd like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it's cold ? c, Once a week
4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos
6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it's cold
* Answer key :
1c 2d 3f 4a 5b 6e
Exercise 4: Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) :
Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She's going on vacation this summer. First,
she is going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is
going to visit Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho
Chi Minh city.They are going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.
1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.
3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.
4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
* Answer key :
1F 2T 3T 4F
Exercise 5 : Complete the following sentences using given words:
1. soil / plants/ if / the / will / polluted / is / die.
2. on / be / there / Friday / meeting / will / a .
3. housework / help / might / robots / do / the / think / us / I.
4. rooms / in / there / house / be / four / will / my.
* Answer key :
1. If the soil is polluted, plants will be die
2. There will be a meeting on Friday
3. I think robots might help us do housework in the future
4. There will be four rooms in my house.
Exercise 6: Complete the following sentences with suitable prepositions:
1. You should have a shower instead ??????.... a bath.
2. I have bought a lot ??????.... things yesterday.
3. What type ??????.... house do you think it is ?
4. He can't go with us because he has to look ??????.... his younger brother.
* Answer key :
1. of 2. of 3. of 4. after
* Adjustment :
?????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????